Yamaha Disklavier Control Unit DKC 850 Operation Manual Dkc850 Om En YC310F0

User Manual: Yamaha Disklavier Control Unit DKC-850 Operation Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 203

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes an external power supply (adaptor).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or
adaptor other than one described in the manual, on the
name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that
when it is properly installed and used in its normal and
customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others
to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be
denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of
knowledge relating to how a function or effect works
(when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered
by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully
and consult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing
units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and
the production methods used to produce them, meet
these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit
of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Model ________________________________________
Serial No. _____________________________________
Purchase Date __________________________________

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes neccessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state,
and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Applies to Power Adaptor
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN THE MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
BLUE
BROWN

: NEUTRAL
: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.

CAUTION—Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.

ATTENTION—L’utilisation de commandes ou de réglages, ou
l’exécution de procédures, autres que celles qui sont spécifiées ici
peuvent conduire à une exposition à des rayonnements dangereux.

VORSICHT—Die Verwendung von Bedienungselementen oder
Einstellungen, oder die Anwendung von Verfahren, die nicht in
dieser Anleitung angegeben sind, kann zu gefährlicher Freisetzung
von Strahlung fü hren.

The control unit is classified as a Class 1 laser product. One of the
labels below is located on the inside of the CD drive unit.
L’unité de commande est classée produit laser de Classe 1. Une des
étiquettes ci-dessous ou une étiquette similaire se trouve à l’intérieur
du lecteur de CD.
Die Steuereinheit ist als ein Lasergerät der Klasse 1 eingestuft. Eins
der nachstehend abgebildeten Etiketts bzw. ein Etikett ähnlichen
Inhalts befindet sich im Inneren des CD-Laufwerks.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
1 ㉏▔‫ܝ‬ѻક

CAUTION

- CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
VORSICHT - SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG
KLASSE 3B, WHEN GEÖFFNET.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
⊼ᛣ
- ᠧᓔᯊ᳝ 3B ㉏ৃ㾕ঞϡৃ㾕▔‫ܝ‬䕤ᇘ
䙓‫ܝܡ‬ᴳ✻ᇘ

Laser Diode Properties
* Material: GaAIAs
* Wavelength: 783 nm
* Laser Output Power at the lens of the Laser Pickup Unit: max.
130.7 mW

Propriétés de la diode à semi-conducteur
* Matériau : GaAlAs
* Longueur d’ondes : 783 nm
* Puissance de sortie laser à la lentille du capteur laser : 130.7 mW
max.

Eigenschaften der Laserdiode
* Werkstoff: GaAlAs
* Wellenlänge: 783 nm
* Laserausgangsleistung an Abtasterlinse: 130.7 mW max.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable
collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate
waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local
municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further
information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set
by the Directive for the chemical involved.

Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des piles usagées et des déchets d’équipements
électriques et électroniques
Les symboles sur les produits, l’emballage et/ou les documents joints signifient que les produits électriques ou
électroniques usagés ainsi que les piles ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels.
Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques et des piles usagées, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la
réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC et 2006/66/EC.
En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques et des piles usagées, vous
contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé
humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d’un traitement inapproprié des déchets.
Pour plus d’informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques et des piles usagées, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le
point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits.
[Pour les professionnels dans l’Union Européenne]
Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre
vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d’informations.
[Information sur le traitement dans d’autres pays en dehors de l’Union Européenne]
Ces symboles sont seulement valables dans l’Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets
d’équipements électriques et électroniques ou de piles usagées, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre
fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée.
Note pour le symbole « pile » (deux exemples de symbole ci-dessous) :
Ce symbole peut être utilisé en combinaison avec un symbole chimique. Dans ce cas il respecte les exigences établies
par la Directive pour le produit chimique en question.

Verbraucherinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung alter Elektrogeräte und benutzterBatterien
Befinden sich diese Symbole auf den Produkten, der Verpackung und/oder beiliegenden Unterlagen, so sollten
benutzte elektrische Geräte und Batterien nicht mit dem normalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden.
In Übereinstimmung mit Ihren nationalen Bestimmungen und den Richtlinien 2002/96/EC und 2006/66/EC, bringen
Sie alte Geräte und benutzte Batterien bitte zur fachgerechten Entsorgung, Wiederaufbereitung und
Wiederverwendung zu den entsprechenden Sammelstellen.
Durch die fachgerechte Entsorgung der Elektrogeräte und Batterien helfen Sie, wertvolle Ressourcen zu schützen
und verhindern mögliche negative Auswirkungen auf die menschliche Gesundheit und die Umwelt, die andernfalls
durch unsachgerechte Müllentsorgung auftreten könnten.
Für weitere Informationen zum Sammeln und Wiederaufbereiten alter Elektrogeräte und Batterien, kontaktieren Sie
bitte Ihre örtliche Stadt- oder Gemeindeverwaltung, Ihren Abfallentsorgungsdienst oder die Verkaufsstelle der
Artikel.
[Information für geschäftliche Anwender in der Europäischen Union]
Wenn Sie Elektrogeräte ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Händler oder Zulieferer für weitere
Informationen.
[Entsorgungsinformation für Länder außerhalb der Europäischen Union]
Diese Symbole gelten nur innerhalb der Europäischen Union. Wenn Sie solche Artikel ausrangieren möchten,
kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtlichen Behörden oder Ihren Händler und fragen Sie nach der sachgerechten
Entsorgungsmethode.
Anmerkung zum Batteriesymbol (untere zwei Symbolbeispiele):
Dieses Symbol kann auch in Kombination mit einem chemischen Symbol verwendet werden. In diesem Fall
entspricht dies den Anforderungen der Direktive zur Verwendung chemischer Stoffe.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party
Address
Telephone
Fax
Type of Equipment
Model Name

: Yamaha Corporation of America
: 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620 USA
: 1-714-522-9011
: 1-714-522-9301
: Player Piano Control Unit
: DKC-850

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly
approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied
with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use
this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic
devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be
the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of
the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If
you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

English

Disklavier Control Unit DKC-850

Operation manual

Welcome to the Yamaha DisklavierTM!
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Disklavier control unit!
This control unit is a fascinating instrument that integrates a classic Yamaha acoustic piano with innovative
electronics to suit your entertainment, educational, and creative needs, while retaining the tone, touch and
long-term value that have long made Yamaha pianos the world’s finest.
English

Before using your Disklavier control unit, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future
reference.

■ Notes on Source Code Distribution
For three years after the factory shipment, you may request from Yamaha the source code for any portions
of the product which are licensed under the GNU General Public License by writing to the following address:
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka, 430-8650, JAPAN
Piano Development Department, Yamaha Corporation
The source code will be provided at no charge; however, we may require you to reimburse Yamaha for the
cost of delivering the source code to you.
The source code download is also available on the following website:
http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/disklavier_e3/
• Note that we shall bear no responsibility whatsoever for any damage arising from changes (additions/
deletions) made to the software for this product by a third party other than Yamaha (or party authorized by
Yamaha).
• Note that re-use of source code released to the public domain by Yamaha is unguaranteed, and Yamaha
shall not bear any responsibility whatsoever for the source code.

■ Trademarks & Copyrights
• The contents of this operation manual and the copyrights thereof are under exclusive ownership by
Yamaha Corporation.
• Yamaha, Disklavier, Silent, PianoSoft, PianoSoft·Plus, and PianoSoft·PlusAudio are trademarks of
Yamaha Corporation.
• SmartKey, CueTIME, and You Are The Artist are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation or Yamaha
Corporation of America.
• Disklavier software, Copyright © 2008 Yamaha Corporation.
• This contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License, GNU Lesser General Public
License, the BSD Copyright, the Artistic License, and the others.
• This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this operation manual are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.

Important Precautions
Read the following before operating the Disklavier control unit.

■ Warnings

■ Cautions

• Do not locate the Disklavier control unit in a
place subject to excessive heat, low
temperatures, or direct sunlight. This could be a
fire hazard and may damage the finish and
internal parts.

• Turn off all audio devices when connecting to
the Disklavier control unit. Refer to the user’s
guide for each device. Use the correct cables
and connect as specified.

• Excessive humidity or dust can lead to fire or
electric shock.
• Connect the plug of the AC adaptor to a
compatible AC outlet. Failure to do so will
present a fire and electric shock hazard. If the
AC adaptor is not compatible with your AC
outlet, consult your dealer.
• Do not plug several devices into the same AC
outlet. This can overload the AC outlet, and lead
to fire and electric shock hazard. It may also
affect the performance of some devices.
• Do not place heavy objects on the AC adaptor
cable. A damaged cable is a potential fire and
electric shock hazard. If the cable runs under a
carpet, make sure heavy objects are not placed
on top of the cable.
• If the AC adaptor cable is damaged (i.e. cut or a
bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the Disklavier control unit in
this condition is a fire and shock hazard.
• When disconnecting the AC adaptor cable from
an AC outlet, always pull from the plug. Never
pull the cable. Damaging the cable in this way is
a potential fire and electric shock hazard.
• The cover of the unit should be removed only by
qualified service technicians.
• Do not place liquid containers such as vases,
potted plants, glasses, cosmetic bottles,
medicines, etc., on the Disklavier control unit.
• Do not try to modify the Disklavier control unit,
as this could lead to fire or electric shock hazard.
• When moving the Disklavier control unit to
another location, turn off the power, remove the
AC adaptor from the AC outlet, and remove all
cables connected to external devices.
• Use only the specified AC adaptor. Use of other
AC adaptors may result in damage, overheating,
or fire.

• Set the volume level on all the devices to
minimum before applying power.
• Do not play the Disklavier control unit at a high
volume for extended periods; you may damage
your hearing. This is especially important when
using headphones. If you think your hearing
ability is impaired, consult your doctor.
• If the Disklavier control unit is worked extremely
hard — that is, prolonged playback of very
“busy” songs — the thermal relay of the
Disklavier control unit may trip. The thermal
relay will automatically reset when the Disklavier
control unit has cooled down.
• If you notice any abnormality — such as smoke,
odor, or noise — turn off the Disklavier control
unit immediately, and remove the AC adaptor
from the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for
repair.
• If a foreign object or water gets inside the
Disklavier control unit turn it off immediately, and
remove the power plug from the AC outlet.
Consult your dealer.
• If you plan not to use the Disklavier control unit
for a long period of time (such as when you are
on vacation), disconnect the AC adaptor from
the AC outlet.
• Always remove the AC adaptor from the AC
outlet before cleaning the Disklavier control unit.
Leaving the AC adaptor connected presents a
risk of electric shock.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning
detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the
Disklavier control unit.
• Do not place metal objects with rubber feet on
the Disklavier control unit. The color and finish of
the Disklavier control unit can be damaged.
• Do not place heavy objects on the Disklavier
control unit. Doing so can damage the Disklavier
control unit.
• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the Disklavier
control unit. However, if you discover a stain,
carefully use a soft damp cloth to remove it.

■ Interference
• The Disklavier control unit uses high-frequency
digital circuits that may cause interference to
radios and TVs placed close to it. If interference
does occur, relocate the affected equipment.

The remote control of this unit is powered by dry
batteries. Improper use or misuse of the dry
batteries can cause the dry batteries to heat up,
leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in
a fire, damage to equipment and/or nearby objects
or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. Read
through and familiarize yourself with the following
safety precautions prior to use to ensure correct
usage.

• Remove spent batteries immediately from
equipment. Otherwise, batteries will
overdischarge, causing them to heat up, leak
electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in
damage to nearby objects or in burns, injury or
other bodily harm.

English

■ Handling Batteries

• When the battery-powered unit is not going to be
used for a prolonged period of time, remove the
dry batteries from the unit. Otherwise the
batteries will run down and their electrolyte may
leak, resulting in damage to the unit.

• Dispose of batteries in accordance with the
applicable regulations and ordinances.
• The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

• Do not directly touch the chemicals (electrolyte)
which have leaked from dry batteries.
1. If electrolyte from dry batteries has made
contact with your eyes, rinse your eyes
thoroughly with clean water and seek medical
treatment from a physician immediately.
2. If electrolyte from dry batteries has touched
your skin or clothing, rinse it off immediately
with clean water.
3. If electrolyte from dry batteries has found its
way inside your mouth, gargle immediately
and consult a physician.
• Do not install the dry batteries with the “+” and
“–” poles reversed. Misaligning the poles of dry
batteries can lead the dry batteries to be
charged or shorted or it can cause them to heat
up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may
result in a fire, damage to nearby objects or in
burns, injury or other bodily harm.
• Use only the designated batteries. Do not use
used batteries with unused batteries or different
types of batteries together. This can cause them
to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn
may result in a fire or in burns, injury or other
bodily harm. Replace all the dry batteries at the
same time. Do not use new and old dry batteries
together. Do not use different types of batteries
(alkaline and manganese batteries, batteries
made by different manufacturers or different
battery products made by the same
manufacturer) together: this can cause them to
heat up, ignite or leak electrolyte.

Please keep this manual for future reference.
iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 1

Introduction

Features .................................................................1
Items Supplied with the Disklavier Control Unit .....1
Names of Parts and Their Functions......................2
Basic Disklavier Terminology .................................6

Chapter 2

Getting Started

Checking the Type of Your Piano ..........................7
Replacing the Existing Control Unit with the
Disklavier Control Unit............................................8
Connecting the Disklavier Control Unit with the
MIDI Cables .........................................................10
Connecting Monitor Speakers..............................12
Using the Remote Control....................................13
Turning On the Disklavier Control Unit.................14
Setting the Type of Your Piano ............................15
Setting the Internal Calendar ...............................16
Turning Off the Disklavier Control Unit
(Standby Mode)....................................................19
Shutting Down the Disklavier Control Unit ...........19
Compatible Media Format for the Removable
Media ...................................................................19
Compatible File Format........................................20
Basic Precautions for Using CDs .........................20

Chapter 3

Basic Song Playback

Types of Playable Software .................................21
Selecting Medium and Their Contents .................22
Using the Number Keypad ...................................25
Starting Playback .................................................25
Stopping Playback ...............................................26
Pausing Playback.................................................26
Fast Preview & Review ........................................27
Fast Forward & Reverse ......................................28
Searching a Specific Section of a Song ...............29
Listening to the DisklavierRadio...........................30
Adjusting the Volume ...........................................31

Chapter 4

Basic Recording

Recording a New Song ........................................32
Titling a Song at the Start of Recording ...............33

Chapter 5

Internet Direct Connection
(IDC)

What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?...........35

Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service
(IDC Registration)................................................ 35
Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet ............ 35
Accessing the Internet......................................... 37
Checking Your Account Information.................... 38
Updating the Disklavier Control Unit Using the
Internet ................................................................ 39
Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for the Internet
Connection .......................................................... 41
Initializing Internet Settings ................................. 42

Chapter 6

Advanced Song Playback

Changing the Playback Tempo ........................... 43
Playing Back Songs in a Different Key
(Transposition) .................................................... 43
Repeating Song Playback ................................... 44
Repeating a Specific Section of a Song
(A-B Repeat) ....................................................... 45
Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part .......... 46
Adjusting the Volume Balance among the
Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback............................................... 48
Adjusting the Pitch of Audio ................................ 50
Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio..................... 50
Using the Timer Play ........................................... 51
Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a
Song .................................................................... 55
SmartKey™ Playback ......................................... 56
Inactivating the Key Movement during
Playback.............................................................. 57

Chapter 7

Advanced Recording

Recording with the Internal Metronome .............. 58
Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately ... 60
Recording the Left and Right Parts Together
(Setting a Split Point)........................................... 62
Re-recording One Part ........................................ 64
Changing the Default Tempo .............................. 65

Chapter 8

Advanced Piano Playing

Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal
Metronome .......................................................... 68
Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice... 69

Chapter 9

Video Synchronization

Video Synchronized Recording............................71
Video Synchronized Playback .............................75

CD Synchronized Recording................................76
Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial
CD Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback) ...................77

Chapter 11 Media Management
Managing Albums ................................................78
Making Copies of Albums ....................................78
Deleting Albums...................................................80
Creating a New Album .........................................81
Renaming an Album ............................................82
Rearranging the Order of Albums ........................84
Managing Songs ..................................................85
Making Copies of Songs ......................................85
Deleting Songs.....................................................87
Renaming a Song ................................................88
Rearranging the Order of Songs..........................89
Converting Song Format......................................90
Changing the Counter Display .............................91
Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form
(Strip XP) .............................................................92
Managing Playlists ...............................................93
Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist ...................94
Deleting a Playlist ................................................95
Creating a New Playlist........................................96
Renaming a Playlist .............................................97
Managing Media ..................................................98
Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a
Medium ................................................................99
Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium .........100
Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to
the Disklavier Control Unit .................................101
Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]............105
Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional) ...............106
Making Backups of Songs .................................107
Restoring the Backups.......................................108

Chapter 12 Enhancing the Disklavier by
Hooking Up Other Devices

Chapter 13

English

Chapter 10 CD Synchronization

Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for Audio Data
Reception/Transmission.................................... 113
Hooking Up MIDI Devices ................................. 115
Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for MIDI Data
Reception .......................................................... 116
Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for MIDI Data
Transmission ..................................................... 118
Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for Keyboard
Playing Data Transmission ............................... 119

Other Settings

Tuning the Tone Generator
(TG Master Tune).............................................. 121
Assigning Frequently-used Functions to the
Number Keypad on the Remote Control ........... 122
Setting the Passcode to Prevent Unauthorized
Access............................................................... 126
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display............. 128
Switching the Languages for the Screen .......... 129
Resetting the Disklavier Control Unit ................ 130
Updating the Disklavier Control Unit ................. 132

Chapter 14

Troubleshooting .................. 134

Chapter 15

Error Messages ................... 137

Chapter 16

Glossary ................................. 139

Chapter 17

Internal Tone Generator
Voices

Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice
List..................................................................... 142
Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice
List..................................................................... 145

Chapter 18

Specifications

General Specifications ...................................... 147
Functions & Controls ......................................... 148

Appendix

Software License Notice ....A-1
MIDI Data Format ..............A-21

MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART

Hooking Up Audio Equipment............................110
Connecting Monitor Speakers............................111

Chapter

Introduction

Features
English

The Disklavier control unit offers the valuable features that open up your musical possibility to explore. Here
are brief explanations of such features:

Advanced Features for Your Listening Pleasure
• Special music CDs, contain over 17 hours of fantastic music, let you start listening on the day this unit
arrives at your home.
• DisklavierRadio; you can listen to over 11 music channel by streaming broadcasts over the Internet.
(Available only on models of which the control unit is replaced with the Disklavier control unit.)

Convenient Recording Features to Preserve Your Musical Memories
• Total 128 megabytes of internal memory comes with the Disklavier control unit to preserve your valuable
data.
• Connecting external USB devices to the Disklavier control unit allows you to record your performance
directly onto them, or even make backups of your valuable data in the internal memory.
• Video synchronization features offer great listening experience with sights. You can see as well as hear
performances with perfectly synchronized audio and video.
• Your valuable music data on the floppy disk can be played back with the optional floppy disk drive (UDFD01).

Simple and Easy-to-use Features Enhancing Your Performance
• The remote control, with clear and logical layout of buttons, lets you quickly enjoy the features of the
Disklavier control unit.
• The display on the front panel employs an organic electro-luminescent display which makes it brighter
and more easily readable than ever.

Items Supplied with the Disklavier Control Unit
Check that the following items are supplied with your Disklavier control unit.
• 1 Remote control
• 2 Batteries for remote control
• 1 Remote control sensor shielding sticker
• 1 Sample PianoSoft CD software
• 2 MIDI cables
• 1 Audio cable (pin plugs – stereo mini plug)
• 2 Audio cables (pin plug – phone plug)
• 1 Conversion cable for control
• 1 AC adaptor (PJP-PS02/PJP-PS04 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
• 1 Power cable
• 1 Operation manual
• 1 PianoSoft CD song list

Chapter

Introduction

Names of Parts and Their Functions
■ Front Panel
4

[ON/OFF] button
Turns on or shuts down the Disklavier control unit.
Press once to turn it on, and once again to shut it
down.
1

Cursor/[ENTER] buttons
Cursor: Used to select options and parameters.
10

Press this button inclining
slightly upward/downward/left/
right.

USB port
Used to connect a USB flash memory, etc.
2

Remote control sensor
When using the remote control, point it toward this
sensor.

[ENTER]: Used to execute the selection.
Press straight the center of
this button.

CD drive
Insert a PianoSoft·PlusAudio or other audio or
audio/MIDI CD here.
4

CD eject button
Used to open the CD drive.
5

Display
Shows various information.
11

[PLAY/PAUSE] button
( pages 25 and 26)
Used to start and pause playback.
6

[STOP] button ( page 26)
Used to stop playback and recording.
7

[RECORD] button ( page 32)
Used to engage the record standby mode before
recording starts.
8

9
[SELECT] button
Used to select media.

Dial
Used to adjust the volume, and to set parameter
values.
12

Chapter

Introduction

■ Rear Panel
1

English

USB TO DEVICE port
Used to connect a USB flash memory, an optional
USB floppy disk drive, etc.
1

2
LAN port
Used to connect to the Internet.

OUTPUT jacks
Used to connect the speaker cord from optional
monitor speakers.
3

ANALOG MIDI IN jacks
Used to connect the audio equipment such as an
external CD changer.
4

MIDI OUT terminal
For models to be replaced with Disklavier control
unit:
Used to connect external MIDI equipment.
For models to be connected with the MIDI cables:
Used to connect the existing control unit.
10

MIDI IN terminal
For models to be replaced with Disklavier control
unit:
Used to connect external MIDI equipment.
For models to be connected with the MIDI cables:
Used to connect the existing control unit.
11

OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks
Used to connect the microphone/line input of a
camcorder.
5

OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks
Used to connect the audio output of a camcorder.
6

7
TO PIANO connectors
Used to connect the piano.

DC-IN 12V connector
Used to connect to the supplied AC adaptor.
8

USB TO HOST port
Used to connect the USB cable from a computer.
9

Chapter

Introduction

■ Remote Control

14
15
16

19
20

7
22
8

23
24

25
26

11
12
27

1
[ON/STANDBY] button
Turns on the Disklavier control unit or puts it in the
standby mode.

5
[RECORD] button ( page 32)
Used to engage the record standby mode before
recording starts.

Number keypad
Used for direct album/song selection and to enter a
start time for song playback.

[PLAY] button ( page 25)
Used to start playback.

[REVERSE]/[FORWARD] buttons
In the play mode: used to fast preview and review.
In the pause mode: used to fast forward and
reverse.
7

[SYSTEM] button
Used to access the system menu.
3

[VOICE] button ( page 69)
Used to access the voice function.
4

Cursor buttons
Used to select options and parameters.
8

Chapter

Introduction
9
[BACK] button
Used to cancel the selection, and return to the
previous screen.

20
[PAUSE] button ( page 26)
Used to pause playback.

[STOP] button ( page 26)
Used to stop playback and recording.
21

[VOLUME] buttons ( page 31)
Used to adjust the volume.
[–] lowers the volume, [+] raises the volume.
10

[TRANSPOSE] buttons
Used to transpose song playback.
[–] transposes down, [+] transposes up, and [0]
resets the transposition value to 00.
12

[INTERNET] button
Used to access the Internet menu.

English

11
[TEMPO] buttons
Used to change the playback tempo.
[–] decreases the tempo, [+] increases the tempo,
and [0] resets the tempo to 00.

[ENTER] button
Used to execute the selection.
22

[FUNC.] button
Used to access the function menu.
23

24
[SELECT] button
Used to select media.

[+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons
Used to select parameters, adjust setting values,
and execute or cancel the selected functions.
25

[SEARCH] button
Used to access the search function.

[BALANCE] button
Used to adjust the TG, audio and voice balance.
26

15
[SETUP] button
Used to access the setup menu.

[METRONOME] button
Used to access the metronome function.
16

27
Color buttons
Green: Used to execute the shortcut assigned to
the number keypad.
Yellow: Used to switch character types when titling
albums and songs.
Red:
For future use.
Blue: For future use.

[REPEAT] button
Used to select one of the repeat modes: ALL, RPT,
RND, or OFF.
17

18
[A-B] button
Used to enter A and B points for the A-B repeat
mode.

[PART SELECT] buttons
For L/R and ensemble songs, these buttons are
used to choose which part will play: left-hand part,
right-hand part, or both parts.
They are also used to select a part for recording.
19

Chapter

Introduction

Basic Disklavier Terminology
The following is a list of several basic Disklavier
words that you may need to know before
proceeding with operational procedures in this
manual. For additional Disklavier terminology, see
the glossary provided in Chapter 16.

PianoSoft·Plus
PianoSoft·Plus software contains
prerecorded ensemble songs featuring
instrumental accompaniment that can be played
back on the Disklavier. See your Disklavier dealer
for a PianoSoft catalog.

Ensemble Song
An ensemble song contains the same left- and
right-hand parts as an L/R song, and extra tracks
that are played by the internal XG tone generator.
Accompanying tracks can include acoustic bass,
drums, strings, vibes, etc.

Internal Flash Memory
The Disklavier control unit has a total of 128
megabytes of internal flash memory that allow you
to store song data without a floppy disk.

L/R Song
In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on
track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored
on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel
either part, and practice that part yourself. When
recording an L/R song, you can record the two
parts simultaneously or separately.

MIDI
An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital
Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other.

PianoSoft
The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a
library of prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha
for use with the Disklavier series. Many titles are
available, and among the many musical styles
included are classical, jazz, and popular. The disk
includes songs for listening enjoyment, piano study
disks for the piano student, and accompaniment
disks for vocal and instrumental practice. PianoSoft
is sometimes used as a generic term for PianoSoft
and PianoSoft·Plus.

PianoSoft·PlusAudio
CD software made by Yamaha
containing audio and MIDI
signals for playing back on the Disklavier.

SmartPianoSoft
Software made by Yamaha
containing MIDI signals for
playing back along with standard audio CDs.

Song
A “song” usually means a short piece of music with
lyrics. However, in this manual the term “song” is
used to refer to any piece of music.

Tone Generator
An electronic device that generates instrument
voices. The Disklavier control unit has an internal
XG tone generator that can produce nearly 700
instrumental and percussion voices.

Voice
The sounds produced by a tone generator
expressing various instruments.

XG
Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM
(General MIDI) format. With greater polyphony,
more voice, and effects, it improves song
compatibility between MIDI devices. When a song
in the Yamaha XG format is played on another XG
compatible tone generator or synthesizer, it will
play and sound as the original composer/creator
intended.

Chapter

Getting Started
This chapter describes instructions for connecting with your Disklavier piano and other
preparation.

Checking the Type of Your Piano
English

The Disklavier control unit can be connected to several models of the Yamaha Disklavier pianos, however,
connections and setup procedures vary depending on the piano model. Check the model number on the
existing control unit and find your piano model following the descriptions below before connecting.
Note:
The model number of the control unit is on the upper part of the display.

■ Models to be Replaced with the Disklavier Control Unit
If you are using the piano listed below, replace the existing control unit with the Disklavier control unit.
Models
Upright pianos

Grand pianos

Model Number on the Control Unit
Disklavier Mark II XG Series

DKC500R, DKC500RXG, DKC500RW,
DKC500RWXG

Disklavier Mark II XG Series (MX600)

DKC50R

Disklavier Mark III Series (DU1A)

DKC55RCD

Disklavier Mark II XG Series

DKC500R, DKC500RXG, DKC500RW,
DKC500RWXG

Disklavier Mark III Series Full-Function Models

DKC55RCD

Disklavier Mark III Series Standard Models

DKC60RCD

Disklavier Mark III Series PRO Models

DKC55RCD

Disklavier Mark III Series Playback Models

DKC55, DKC55CD

For details on connections and setup, see Chapter 2 “Getting Started – Replacing the Existing Control Unit
with the Disklavier Control Unit” on page 8.
Note:
You can also connect the piano listed above with the Disklavier control unit using the MIDI cables. However, you cannot use Internet Direct
Connection when connected with the MIDI cables.

■ Models to be Connected with the MIDI Cables
If you are using the piano listed below, connect your piano to the Disklavier control unit with the MIDI
cables.
Models

Model Number on the Control Unit

Upright pianos

Disklavier Mark II Series

DKC100R or built-in

Grand pianos

Disklavier Mark II Series

DKC100R

For details on connections and setup, see Chapter 2 “Getting Started – Connecting the Disklavier Control
Unit with the MIDI Cables” on page 10.
Note:
You cannot replace the control unit of the piano listed above with the Disklavier control unit.
Note:
You cannot use Internet Direct Connection on the piano listed above.

Chapter

Getting Started

Replacing the Existing Control Unit with the Disklavier Control Unit
Connect the Disklavier control unit to your piano, replacing with the existing control unit.

Tighten
Disklavier
control unit

6
Conversion
cable
(supplied)

AC adaptor (PJP-PS02/PJP-PS04)
(supplied)

Connect monitor
speakers.
See page 12.

Power cable
(supplied)

Control
cable

Your piano

Tighten

Loosen

Cautions
• Use the Yamaha PJP-PS02/PJP-PS04 adaptor, or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. Use of
other AC adaptors may result in damage, overheating, or fire.
• Do not stretch the cable or bend its ends.
• Do not attempt to use the cable if it is stretched or if the ends of the cable have been bent. Attempting
to do so may cause interruptions to the power supply.
• Always turn off the main unit power before disconnecting the AC adaptor.
• When you wish to move the Disklavier control unit, unplug the AC adaptor from the AC wall outlet
and disconnect if from the DC-IN 12V connector on the rear panel of the Disklavier control unit before
proceeding.
• Unplug the AC adaptor from the AC wall outlet if you do not intend to use the instrument for an
extended period of time.

Chapter

Getting Started

Important
• Be sure to backup the data on your control unit to the floppy disk before connecting.
• Please keep the disconnected control unit for future maintenance.
English

Turn on your piano, and reset settings on your control unit
to its factory default.
For details on setting, refer to your piano’s owner’s manual.

Turn off your piano, and disconnect the power cable from
the AC wall outlet.

Disconnect the control cable from the TO CONTROL
CABLE FOR PIANO connector on the rear panel of your
control unit.

Note:
The location of the TO CONTROL
CABLE FOR PIANO connector
varies depending on the piano
model.

Loosen the two screws attached to the connector by the
screwdriver.

Connect the supplied conversion cable to the control
cable disconnected in step 2.
Tighten the two screws attached to the connector by the
screwdriver.

Attention:
The Disklavier control unit does not
work properly if the control cable is
connected directly to it. Use the
supplied conversion cable to
connect your piano and the
Disklavier control unit.

Connect the supplied conversion cable to the TO PIANO
connector on the rear panel of the Disklavier control unit.
Tighten the two screws attached to the connector by the
screwdriver.

Connect monitor speakers to the OUTPUT jacks on the
rear panel of the Disklavier control unit.

Connect the supplied AC adaptor to the DC-IN 12V
connector on the rear panel of the Disklavier control unit.

Connect the supplied power cable to the AC adaptor.

Connect the power cable extended from your piano and
the AC adaptor to the AC wall outlet.

The connection completed.
Turn on the Disklavier control unit, and set the piano type.


See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Connecting Monitor Speakers” on
page 12.


See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Setting the Type of Your Piano” on
page 15.

Chapter

Getting Started

Connecting the Disklavier Control Unit with the MIDI Cables
Connect the Disklavier control unit to your piano using the MIDI cables.

3, 4

Connect monitor speakers.
See page 12.
Disklavier
control unit

Your control unit

MIDI cable (supplied)

AC adaptor
(PJP-PS02/PJP-PS04)
(supplied)
Power cable
(supplied)

Your piano

Backing paper

Adhesive tape
Remote control sensor
shielding sticker
Remote control
sensor

Chapter

Getting Started

Important
Be sure to backup the data on your control unit to the floppy disk before connecting.

English

Turn on your piano, and reset settings on your control unit
to its factory default.
For details on setting, refer to your piano’s owner’s manual.

Turn off your piano, and disconnect the power cable from
the AC wall outlet.

Connect the MIDI IN terminal of your control unit to the
MIDI OUT terminal of the rear panel of the Disklavier
control unit with the supplied MIDI cable.

Connect the MIDI OUT terminal of your control unit to the
MIDI IN terminal of the rear panel of the Disklavier control
unit with the supplied MIDI cable.

Connect monitor speakers to the OUTPUT jack on the rear
panel of the Disklavier control unit.

Connect the supplied AC adaptor to the DC-IN 12V
connector on the rear panel of the Disklavier control unit.

Connect the supplied power cable to the AC adaptor.

Connect the power cable extended from your piano and
the AC adaptor to the AC wall outlet.

Place the remote control sensor shielding sticker over the
remote control sensor of the control unit of your piano.

Note:
The location of the MIDI IN/MIDI
OUT terminals varies depending on
the piano model.
Note:
Be sure to connect your control unit
and the Disklavier control unit with
two MIDI cables for input and
output.


See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Connecting Monitor Speakers” on
page 12.

Note:
For the location of the remote
control sensor, refer to your piano’s
owner’s manual.

The remote control supplied with the Disklavier control unit will also
operate the control unit of your piano. In order to prevent this, be
sure to place the remote control sensor shielding sticker.

Turn on your piano, and make the MIDI data transmission/
reception settings on the control unit of your piano.
Make the settings as follows. For details on setting, refer to your
piano’s owner’s manual.

Note:
If you connect your control unit,
which is replaceable with the
Disklavier control unit, with the
MIDI cables, set the HOST
SELECT switch on your control unit
to the “MIDI” position.

Settings
MIDI IN CH
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
OUT CH

HP
DELAY IN (500ms)
KBD OUT
HP

The connection completed.
Turn on the Disklavier control unit, and set the piano type.


See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Setting the Type of Your Piano” on
page 15.

Chapter

Getting Started

Connecting Monitor Speakers
To listen to the internal XG tone generator voices, you have to connect
monitor speakers. Connection methods vary depending on whether your
piano is equipped with the Silent Piano™ function or not.

■ For Pianos Equipped with the Silent Piano™
Function
Connect the AUX IN jacks of your piano to the OUTPUT jacks on the rear
of the Disklavier control unit with the supplied audio cable.
For models with the control box
Connect with the supplied audio
cable (pin plugs – stereo mini plug).

For models with the amplifier
Connect with the supplied audio
cables (pin plug – phone plug).

To AUX IN jack
(stereo mini plug)

To AUX IN jacks
(phone plug)

Audio cable
(supplied)
Disklavier
control unit

Disklavier
control unit

Audio cables
(supplied)

■ For Pianos Not Equipped with the Silent Piano™
Function
Connect the input jacks of monitor speakers (phone jacks) to the OUTPUT
jacks on the rear of the Disklavier control unit with the supplied audio
cables (pin plug – phone plug).
AC wall outlet
Monitor
speaker (left)

Monitor
speaker (right)
POWER
ON

OFF

POWER

POWER
ON

INPUT

LINE 1
(--10dB)

OFF

LINE 1
(--10dB)

OFF

LINE 2
(--4dB)

PARALLEL

Audio cable
(supplied)
Disklavier
control unit

PARALLEL

Audio cable
(supplied)

Note:
The shape of units or the location of
the AUX IN jacks varies depending
on the piano model.

Chapter

Getting Started

Using the Remote Control
The Disklavier control unit is equipped with a remote control which allows
convenient control from almost anywhere in the room. This section
provides notes on handling the remote control.

English

■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Before the remote control can be used, the two batteries supplied with the
Disklavier control unit must be installed.
Remove the battery cover from the rear of the remote control, install the
batteries, and then replace the cover.

A diagram inside the battery compartment shows which way the batteries
should be installed. Make sure you insert them correctly.

■ Battery Replacement
When the remote control fails to work from a distance, replace the
batteries.
• Replacement batteries should be UM-3, AA, R6P, or LR6 type.
• Do not use new and old dry batteries together.

Important:
Be sure to read the section on
“Handling Batteries” on page iii for
details on the safe handling of dry
batteries.

• Do not use different types of batteries (alkaline and manganese
batteries, batteries made by different manufacturers or different battery
products made by the same manufacturer) together.
• Remove spent batteries immediately from the remote control.
Otherwise, batteries will overdischarge, causing them to leak electrolyte
or burst which in turn may result in damage to nearby objects or in
burns, injury or other bodily harm.
• Dispose of batteries in accordance with the applicable regulations and
ordinances.
• If the remote control is not to be used for a prolonged period of time,
remove the batteries to prevent possible damage by battery leakage.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked electrolyte or letting it come into contact with skin or
clothing. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.

Chapter

Getting Started

■ Using the Remote Control
To use the remote control, point it at the remote control sensor on the front
panel.

Approx. 5 m

30°
30°

Turning On the Disklavier Control Unit

Make sure that the AC adaptor is plugged into the AC wall
outlet.
When you connected the Disklavier control unit to your piano with
the MIDI cables, first turn on the power of your piano.

Press [ON/OFF] on the front panel.

While the control unit is in the standby mode, you can also turn on
the Disklavier control unit by pressing [ON/STANDBY] on the
remote control.

The following message appears on the display, and [ON/OFF] on
the front panel lights green.

After several seconds, the loading screen will appear, and last
selected song will be loaded.

PLEASE WAIT

=Memory=
------<-----> (no

Your Disklavier control unit is now ready for use.
14

V+00

song)


See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Turning Off the Disklavier Control
Unit (Standby Mode)” on page 19.

Chapter

Getting Started

Setting the Type of Your Piano
[SYSTEM]

“PianoType”

After you have connected the Disklavier control unit to your piano, you
must set the type of your piano.

English

Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.

!"#$%{

Select “PianoType” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SYSTEM MENU= _(2/2)
*Language *PianoType
*Display
The piano type setup screen appears.

=PianoType=
>Type=Replace
>Piano=REC

-+ENT

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the connection type
setting.
=PianoType=
>Type=Add

-+ENT

The following connection type settings are available:
Setting

Description

Replace

Select this when you replaced the existing unit with
the Disklavier control unit (see page 8).

Add

Select this when you connected the Disklavier
control unit to your piano with the MIDI cables (see
page 10).

Note:
If you select “Replace” and this unit
detects your piano as the playback
model, “[PB]” appears on the right
of the screen.

Chapter

Getting Started

Press [ENTER].
If the piano type has been changed, this unit is automatically
rebooted.

=PianoType=
Restarting...

Setting the Internal Calendar
[SYSTEM]

“TimeZone” and “Clock Adj.”

The Disklavier control unit has an internal calendar that can be set from 1/
1/1985 00:00:00 to 12/31/2084 23:59:59. Set the calendar accurately so
that the Disklavier control unit displays the correct current time during the
stop mode.
Time is displayed in 24-hour format.

■ Time Zone

Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.

!"#$%{

Select “TimeZone” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
!"#$%{

The time zone setup screen appears.

][

]


Setting the correct time is also
important for engaging timercontrolled programs. See Chapter 6
“Advanced Song Playback – Using
the Timer Play” on page 51.

Chapter

Getting Started

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the time zone.

Note:
The time zone listed here should be
used only as a guide. For more
details, contact your local
observatories.

English

Examples of Time Zone
The chart below shows the correspondence between the time zone
setting on the Disklavier control unit and actual time zone used in
each area.
For U.S. and Canada:
Setting

Actual Time Zone

GMT-10

Hawaii-Aleutian Standard Time

GMT-9

Alaska Standard Time (AKST)

GMT-8

Alaska Daylight Time (AKDT)
Pacific Standard Time (PST)

GMT-7

Pacific Daylight Time (PDT)
Mountain Standard Time (MST)

GMT-6

Mountain Daylight Time (MDT)
Central Standard Time (CST)

GMT-5

Central Daylight Time (CDT)
Eastern Standard Time (EST)

GMT-4

Eastern Daylight Time (EDT)

For Europe:

Setting

Actual Time Zone

GMT+0

U.K.

GMT+1

Central Europe (Paris, Berlin)

GMT+2

Eastern Europe (Athens)

Press [ENTER].

The time zone is set, and the display returns to the system menu.
Proceed to the calendar setting.

Chapter

Getting Started

■ Calendar

Select “Clock Adj.” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

!"#$%{

The current date and time appear.

Press [ENTER].
The time setup screen appears with the cursor flashing on the
hours display.

}{

Select year, month, date, hours, minutes, and seconds
with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and
[–/NO] to set a value.

}{

Press [ENTER].

The date and time are stored in the internal calendar, and the
display returns to the current time screen.

Press [BACK] on the remote control.

The display returns to the system menu screen.

Press [SYSTEM] to exit from the system menu.

Chapter

Getting Started

Turning Off the Disklavier Control Unit (Standby Mode)
Press [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control.
The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the front panel lights
red.

Note:
Press [ON/STANDBY] on the
remote control to turn the Disklavier
control unit back on.

English

See you again
When you connected the Disklavier control unit to your piano with
the MIDI cables, turn off your piano.

Shutting Down the Disklavier Control Unit
Press [ON/OFF] on the front panel.
The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the front panel turns
off.

Note:
Be sure to wait 5 seconds before
turning the Disklavier control unit
back on.

See you again
When you connected the Disklavier control unit to your piano with
the MIDI cables, turn off your piano.

Compatible Media Format for the Removable Media
Compact Disc
The Disklavier control unit can play songs on commercial audio CDs and
data CDs (such as PianoSoft·PlusAudio).
• The audio CDs should be formatted in CD-DA.
• The data CDs should be formatted in ISO 9660 Level 1.

USB Flash Memory
You can use commercially available USB flash memories to store song
data. The USB flash memory should be formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 file
system.

Note:
If the external medium contains a
number of albums or songs, it may
take some time for the Disklavier
control unit to recognize them.
Note:
Do not insert or remove the USB
media while reading or writing data.
Make sure that reading or writing
has finished before doing so.

USB Hard Disk
You can use commercially available USB hard disk drives to store song
data or make a backup of song data. The USB hard disk drive should be
formatted in FAT32 file system.

Floppy Disk (Optional)
With the optional USB floppy disk drive, you can use 3.5” 2DD or 2HD floppy
disks to store song data. The floppy disk should be formatted in MS-DOS.
19

Chapter

Getting Started

Compatible File Format
The Disklavier control unit can handle these three types of file format:

SMF0
Standard MIDI File format 0 for playback and recording. The name of the
file should have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.”

SMF1
Standard MIDI File format 1 for playback only. The name of the file should
have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.”

E-SEQ
Format developed by Yamaha, for playback only. The name of the file
should have an extension as “.FIL” or “.fil.”

Basic Precautions for Using CDs
■ Handling CDs
In order to protect data stored on compact discs from damage or loss,
handle them with care, and observe the following precautions.
• Do not touch the surface of a CD.
• Do not expose CDs to extreme temperatures or humidity. The working
temperature range is between 4°C and 52°C (40°F and 125°F).
• Wipe CDs with a clean, dry cloth before playback.
• Remove the CD from the CD drive before turning off the Disklavier
control unit.

■ Loading a CD

Press the CD eject button on the front panel to open the
CD tray.

CD eject button

2
20

Place a CD on the tray, and then close the tray.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Types of Playable Software

When piano songs such as those contained in
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus software are played back
on the Disklavier, the piano parts are actually played by the Disklavier
keyboard, and the keys move up and down as though they were being
played by an invisible performer. The ensemble parts (contained in
PianoSoft·Plus software) are played by the internal tone generator and are
heard from optional monitor speakers.

English

PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus

PianoSoft·PlusAudio
PianoSoft·PlusAudio songs are recorded using two
channels, an analog MIDI channel for the piano parts
and an audio channel for instrumentals and vocals. When they are played
back on the Disklavier, the piano parts area played by the Disklavier
keyboard as with PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs, and all other
instrumental and vocal parts are heard from optional monitor speakers just
like a normal stereo system.

SmartPianoSoft
SmartPianoSoft contains a recorded piano
accompaniment to the commercial CDs, and the acoustic
accompaniment will play back matching with the commercial CD. You can
also record your own accompaniment for your favorite commercial CDs at
home; play your Disklavier as you listen to a CD, and SmartPianoSoft will
match the music together during playback, essentially adding you to
famous performances.

Standard Audio CDs
Standard audio CDs contain two audio channels (L and R), and are both
heard from optional monitor speakers just like a normal stereo system. In
other words, the Disklavier can be used to play CDs in place of a stereo
system.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Selecting Medium and Their Contents
[SELECT]

Insert a desired medium.
CD

CD eject button

USB flash memory

USB port

Press [SELECT].
The media selection screen appears with the current selected
medium highlighted.

=MEDIA SELECT=

or
Front panel

Remote control



Memory CD

Select a desired medium with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]).



]

Note:
“D-Radio” is available only on
models of which the control unit is
replaced with the Disklavier control
unit.


See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback
– Listening to the DisklavierRadio”
on page 30.

The following media are available:

Medium

Description

Memory

Internal flash memory

Audio CD or data CD

USB1,
USB2

USB flash memory or USB HDD (USB1 indicates the
first inserted one, and USB2 indicates the second.)

Playlist

Playlist in the internal flash memory

D-Radio

DisklavierRadio

FromToPC

Network folder in the internal flash memory


See Chapter 11 “Media
Management – Copying Song File
from a Personal Computer to the
Disklavier Control Unit” on
page 101.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Press [ENTER] or [

The album selection screen appears.

=ALBUM SELECT=



01:50 Greats for t
English

Select a desired album with the cursor buttons ([
=ALBUM SELECT=

][

]).

?=]

Note:
You can also select albums directly
using the number keypad on the
remote control. See Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Using the
Number Keypad” on page 25.

01:50 Greats for t
Album number

Album title

To return to the media selection screen, press [

Press [ENTER] or [

Note:
The maximum number of the
selectable albums in a medium is 99.

The song selection screen appears.

=SONG SELECT=

001:Invention 1

Select a desired song with the cursor buttons ([
=SONG SELECT=

001:Invention 1
Song number

?=]

Song title

To return to the album selection screen, press [

][



]).

Note:
The maximum number of the
selectable songs in an album is 999.
Note:
You can also select songs directly
using the number keypad on the
remote control. See Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Using the
Number Keypad” on page 25.

Press [ENTER].

The selected song is loaded.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

■ Song Playback Screen
Here are a few things that you will often see during playback.
1

2
3

1
Media
The selected medium is displayed here.

Album/Song Number
The number of the selected album and song is
displayed here.
2

Display

Description

Axx-yyy

xx: album number (01 to 99)
yyy: song number (001 to 999)

Pxx-yyy

xx: playlist number (01 to 99)
yyy: song number (001 to 999)

5
Song Format
The format of the selected song is displayed here.

Display

Description

SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0

SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1

E-SEQ format

6
Volume
The current volume setting is displayed here.

Song Title
The title of the selected song is displayed here. If
the title is long, it scrolls across the display.
7

Counter
Playing time is indicated in one of two formats.
3

Display

Description

xx:yy

Minutes (xx) and seconds (yy)

xxx-y

Measures (xxx) and beats (y)

Song Type
The type of the selected songs is displayed here.
4

Display

Description

PianoSoft

PianoSoft recorded on the PRO model

SmartPianoSoft

SmartKey

PianoSoft·PlusAudio

Stereo audio

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Using the Number Keypad
Album or song selection screen

Number button

You can also select albums or songs directly with the number keypad on
the remote control.
Note:
If you enter a number higher than
the existed, the last album or song
appears.

English

Press the corresponding number button, then press
[ENTER].
For example, to select album number 5, first press [0], then [5],
then [ENTER] in the album selection screen.

=ALBUM SELECT= 0-9/ENT

05:

To select song number 36, first press [0], then [3], then [6], then
[ENTER] in the song selection screen.

036:

Starting Playback
[PLAY]

Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel or [PLAY] on the
remote control.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel lights green, and the numerical
value of the counter advances.
or
Front panel

Remote control

=Memory=
A02-001
<00:01>

Note:
If your piano is in the Silent Piano™
function mode, the damper pedal
does not move. However, the
damper effect is effective for the
piano tone.

LR SO V+00

Piano Sonate

At the end of the song, the Disklavier control unit selects the next
song automatically and continues playback.
After playback the last song in the album, playback stops.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Stopping Playback
During playback

[STOP]

Press [STOP].
or
Front panel

Remote control

Playback stops, and the song returns to the beginning.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel turns off, and the counter is reset
to “00:00” or “001-1.”

Pausing Playback
During playback

[PAUSE]

Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel, or [PAUSE] on
the remote control.
or
Front panel

Remote control

Playback pauses.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel flashes, and the counter stops
counting.

Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel or [PLAY] on the
remote control to continue playback.
or
Front panel

Remote control

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Fast Preview & Review
During playback

[FORWARD] or [REVERSE]

During playback, fast preview and review allow you to quickly search
through a song while listening to the sound. This is useful for locating a
desired position within a song.

English

■ Fast Preview

Note:
No sound is produced by the piano
when fast-previewing or reviewing
PianoSoft·PlusAudio CDs.

To preview, hold [ ] on the front panel or press
[FORWARD] on the remote control.
or
Front panel

Remote control

Release [ ] on the front panel, or press [FORWARD] on
the remote control again to return to normal playback.
If a song is previewed all the way to the end, it will be paused at the
end of the song.

■ Fast Review

To review, hold [ ] on the front panel or press
[REVERSE] on the remote control.
or
Front panel

Remote control

Release [ ] on the front panel, or press [REVERSE] on
the remote control again to return to normal playback.
If a song is reviewed all the way to the beginning, it will be paused
at the beginning of the song.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Fast Forward & Reverse
Stop or pause mode

[FORWARD] or [REVERSE]

In the stop or pause mode, fast forward and reverse allow you to quickly
locate a desired position in a song.
Reverse can also be used to return a song to the beginning, ready to play
again.

■ Fast Forward

In the stop or pause mode, hold [ ] on the front panel or
press [FORWARD] on the remote control.
=Memory=

or
Front panel

Remote control

LR SO V+00

<00:15> FORWARD

[PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel flashes quickly and the counter
shows the current position.

Release [ ] on the front panel, or press [FORWARD] on
the remote control again to return to the pause mode.
If you fast forward a song all the way to the end, it will be paused at
the end of the song.

■ Fast Reverse

In the pause mode, hold [ ] on the front panel or press
[REVERSE] on the remote control.
=Memory=

or
Front panel

Remote control

LR SO V+00

<02:22> REWIND

[PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel flashes quickly and the counter
shows the current position.

Release [ ] on the front panel, or press [REVERSE] on
the remote control again to return to the pause mode.
If you reverse a song all the way to the beginning, it will be paused
at the beginning of the song.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Searching a Specific Section of a Song
During playback or stop/pause mode

[SEARCH]

Playback can be started from a specified point in a song. Instead of using
fast forward or preview, you can use this function to go directly to a desired
point within a song.

English

If the current song uses the “minutes and seconds” format, you specify the
point in minutes and seconds. If it uses the “measures and beats” format,
you specify the point in measures and beats.

Press [SEARCH] on the remote control.
The song search screen appears with the counter flashing.

=Memory=
A02-001
<00:00>

0-9/SEARCH

Flashes

The song will be paused at the exact point as you press [SEARCH].

Enter the time that you want to search for with the number
keypad.

Note:
If you enter a value higher than the
entire song time, the search goes to
the end of the song.

For example, to search for 2:56 (minutes and seconds), first press
[0], then [2], [5], and [6] when the counter is in the “minutes and
seconds” format.

=Memory=
A02-001
<02:56>

0-9/SEARCH

For example, to search for 52-3 (measures and beats), first press
[0], then [5], [2], and [3] when the counter is in the “measures and
beats” format.

=Memory=
A02-001
<052-3>

0-9/SEARCH

Press [SEARCH] again.

The position of the song goes to the specified point.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

Listening to the DisklavierRadio
Media selection screen

“D-Radio”

You can listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels of
music contents.

Select “D-Radio” in the media selection screen.


To enjoy the DisklavierRadio, first
you need to connect to the Internet.
See Chapter 5 “Internet Direct
Connection (IDC) – Connecting the
Disklavier to the Internet” on
page 35.

The channel selection screen appears.

Note:
DisklavierRadio is available only on
models of which the control unit is
replaced with the Disklavier control
unit.

][{

01:Complimentary C



Press [

] or [

] or [+/YES] or [–/NO] to select a channel.

Press [ENTER] or [
selected channel.

}][{

] to begin the broadcast of the

The DisklavierRadio screen appears.
Channel
Number Medium

=D-Radio=
CH-08:
My
Jazz
Channel Title

V+00

Funny Val
Song Title

Press [ ] twice to stop the broadcast and return to the
media selection screen.
×2

Volume

To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

Chapter

Basic Song Playback

■ Muting the Sound

Press [PAUSE] or [STOP].
“MUTE” appears on the upper right of the screen.

MUTE

Funny Val

English

=D-Radio=
CH-08:
My
Jazz

Note:
Streaming broadcasts continue
during muting. Therefore, the song
broadcasted when releasing muting
may differ from the one when
muting.

Press [PAUSE] or [STOP] again to release muting.
or

Adjusting the Volume
[VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –]

You can adjust volume with the dial on the front panel or with the remote
control as described below. Since all piano songs are recorded at the
maximum volume level of 0, volume can be decreased down to –10, the
softest volume at which the piano can play.
For ensemble songs, the volume of the piano and internal XG tone
generator are adjusted simultaneously, so it is a good idea to first balance
the volume of the piano and XG tone generator.
For songs on PianoSoft·PlusAudio, you should first balance the volume of
the MIDI piano and audio parts.

Note:
This setting does not affect manual
playing.


See Chapter 6 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 48.

Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] on the remote control.
The main volume setting screen appears.

=BALANCE=

VOLUME-/+

MAIN VOLUME -01

Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] to adjust the volume.

Volume can be adjusted in a range of –10 to 0.

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to adjust the volume.
Note:
When the volume is set to –10, there
may be a slight delay in sound
production following key strokes,
and the Disklavier control unit may
skip some notes. Furthermore, at
this volume setting, touch strength
does not affect note dynamics.

Chapter

Basic Recording
A song that you play on the Disklavier can be recorded and the recorded song can be easily
saved for the selected medium. Furthermore, you can title your new recording for simple
distinguish before recording.

Recording a New Song
[RECORD]

You can save a new song that you play for an album.

Select a destination medium and album.

Press [RECORD].

=Memory=
A01-039
<00:00>

S0 LR 99%

(New Song)

The level appears in the format section as soon as you play a
keyboard or press a pedal.

Press [PLAY].

[PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing.
The Disklavier is now ready for you to play.

Start playing your song.
Recording will start automatically as soon as you touch a key. The
counter starts to advance.

=Memory=
A01-039
<00:01>

S0 LR 99%

(New Song)

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.

The recorded song is loaded.

Note:
Up to 999 songs can be recorded in a
medium.


The recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the front
panel lights red and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green.

Note:
You cannot record a song on the
playback model.

To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.
Note:
You cannot select “CD”, “Playlist”
and “D-Radio” as the destination
medium.

Chapter

Basic Recording

Titling a Song at the Start of Recording
[RECORD]

[FUNC.]×2

Title a new song before you start recording.

Select a destination medium and album.

Press [RECORD].

Press [FUNC.] twice in the recording standby screen.


To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.

English


To rename the existing song, see
Chapter 11 “Media Management –
Renaming a Song” on page 88.

The song title editing screen appears.

=Memory=

[A-Z]

×2

Enter a title to a new song.
=Memory=
Chopin

[a-z]

You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on next page.

Press [PLAY] after title determined.

Recording begins.

Chapter

Basic Recording

■ Entering Characters
How to Enter Characters with the Remote Control
The following illustration shows how to enter characters with the remote control.

Number keypad
Overwrites a number.
[SEARCH] button
Overwrites a dot (.).

[REVERSE] button
Deletes a character. The characters on the right of the deleted one
move to the left for one character space.
[FORWARD] button
Inserts a space.
[ ]/[ ] buttons
Moves the cursor left and right.
[+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons
Selects the character. Pressing these keys simultaneously
overwrites a space.
Yellow button
Switches the character types.
The character type cycles as follows each time you press this button:
[A-Z]: letters (upper case)
[a-z]: letters (lower case)
[etc]: symbols
[0-9]: numbers

Available Characters
The following table shows which characters are available.
Character Type
Letters
(Upper Case)
[A-Z]
Letters
(Lower Case)
[a-z]
Symbols
[etc]
Numbers
[0-9]

Characters
Space

Space

”

’

(

)

;

Space

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
By connecting to the Internet, you can enjoy a streaming broadcast or download update
programs directly. Internet Direct Connection is available only on models of which the control
unit is replaced with the Disklavier control unit.

What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?
Note:
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) is
available only on models of which
the control unit is replaced with the
Disklavier control unit.

English

Internet Direct Connection (IDC) is a feature that allows you to connect
your Disklavier directly to the Internet. Internet Direct Connection users are
able to listen to a streaming broadcast (DisklavierRadio), and receive
valuable information such as product updates. Your Disklavier can be
upgraded remotely as new technologies and services are developed
through the IDC service.

Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service
(IDC Registration)
To use the IDC service, initial registration is required using an Internetconnected computer.
Please register at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Once you have an IDC account, you will interact with that account using
the remote control. To use the full IDC service, you are required to enter
your registered ID (e-mail address) and password with the remote control.

Note:
If you have already registered for
the IDC service with any other
instrument (such as the Clavinova),
you do not need to register again.
You can use your ID and password
obtained through that registration.
Note:
Some IDC service functions do not
require an ID and password.

Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet
You can connect the Disklavier to a full-time online Internet connection
(ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped
with a router.

■ Preparations
• To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an
Internet service or provider.
• Use a computer to obtain and configure Internet service. You cannot
obtain Internet service or configure router settings on a local area
network using the Disklavier control unit itself.
• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to connect the control unit and
a router.
• Before connecting the LAN cable, make sure to turn off (or shut down)
the Disklavier control unit.

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

■ Connecting the Disklavier Control Unit to the
Internet
Connection example 1:
Using a modem with router function
Modem
(with router function)

Other device
(such as computer)

LAN
cable

Note:
Some types of modems (such as
ADSL modems or cable modems)
have multiple ports for connecting
two or more devices (such as
computer, musical instrument, etc.).
If your modems have only one port,
an optional router or hub is required
in order to connect several devices
simultaneously.
Note:
Use an STP (shielded twisted pair)
cable for connection.

Disklavier control unit

Connection example 2:
Using a modem without router function

Modem
(without router
function)

Router

Other device
(such as computer)

LAN
cable

Disklavier control unit

Note:
Depending on the contract with your
Internet provider, you may not be
able to connect two or more devices
(for example, a computer and this
unit) to the Internet. Please check
your contract or contact your
Internet provider for further
information.

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

For further information on the Internet connection (only a wired LAN
connection is supported), visit the Yamaha Disklavier website:
http://services.music.yamaha.com/radio/

■ Notes on Network Security
English

The Disklavier control unit attempts to achieve a balance between security
and usability in its network implementation. However, a determined hacker
may be able to defeat these security measures and utilize the network of
the purchaser in an unauthorized manner. Since each network is different,
only the purchaser can determine whether the security measures
discussed here will adequately protect their network.
The purchaser acknowledges that connection to the Internet and use of the
Disklavier control unit Internet features is done at the risk of the purchaser.
In no event shall Yamaha, its subsidiaries or Yamaha’s and/or its
subsidiaries’ directors, officers, or employees be responsible for
unauthorized access, loss or alteration of the data of the purchaser or be
liable for any damage from intrusions.

Accessing the Internet
[INTERNET]

Once you have established an IDC account and successfully connected
your Disklavier to the Internet, you can access a special Disklavier website
where you can access the DisklavierRadio, and download software
updates.

Note:
Free contents that do not require an
ID and password are available.

D-Radio



Select this to listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels
of music content. You can enjoy listening to piano performances that play
continuously.

See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback
– Listening to the DisklavierRadio”
on page 30.

Note:
The service contents are subject to
change without prior notice.

MyAccount
Select this to log in to the IDC service. You can also refer to the help
information from this option.

Update
Select this to update the Disklavier control unit using Internet connection.

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.

(1/1)
=Internet=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update

Select a desired menu with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

Perform operations on the screen that appears.

Checking Your Account Information
[INTERNET]

“MyAccount”

You can confirm your current account information of IDC service. You can
also log out from the IDC service.

Logout
If you wish to use another IDC account or prevent the current account from
being used by others, select this to log out from the IDC service.

Account Information
Select this to confirm your account information.

Subscription Status
Select this to confirm your DisklavierRadio subscription status.

Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.

=Internet=
(1/1)
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update

Note:
ID and password are not required for
free contents (such as free channel
of DisklavierRadio).

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

Select “MyAccount” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

(1/1)
=Internet=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update
English

The MyAccount screen appears.

]

Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].

][

]),

Perform operations on the screen that appears.

Updating the Disklavier Control Unit Using the Internet
[INTERNET]

“Update”

You can download the update program directly from the Internet and
update the firmware of the Disklavier control unit.

Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.

(1/1)
=Internet=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

Select “Update” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

(1/1)
=Internet=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update
The update screen appears if there is any update program
available.

]

You can scroll the screen up or down with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]).

]

Following the instructions on the screen, select the option
with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press
[ENTER].

][

The download process of the update program starts.

=Update=
Now Downloading...
50% ( 1 / 1 )

Shut down the Disklavier control unit with [ON/OFF] on the
front panel after the download process is completed.

]

The update program is now prepared.
Update the firmware following the procedures in Chapter 13 “Other
Settings – Updating the Disklavier Control Unit” on page 132.

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for the Internet Connection
[SETUP]

“Network”

You can change various settings related to the Internet connection. In most
cases, you do not have to change the default factory settings.

Information


To use the Internet connection,
inquire of your Internet service
provider.

Use DHCP
Select the method to determine several addresses. If your router has
DHCP server function, we recommend that you to select “DHCP” or
“DHCP+DNS.”

English

Note:
For information about DNS server
address, IP address, subnet mask
and gateway server address, inquire
of your internet service provider.

You can confirm the information of network settings.

DNS1/DNS2
Enter the address of the primary and secondary DNS server. These
settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “DHCP+DNS” or
“MANUAL.”

IPAddr./SubMask/Gateway
Enter the address of the control unit, subnet mask and gateway server.
These settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “MANUAL.”

Proxy/Proxy Port
Enter the name and the port number for the proxy server. These settings
are necessary only when a proxy server is located in your local network.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “Network” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SETUP MENU=
_(2/3)]
*Network
*Playback
*Shortcut
The network setting screen appears.

]

Chapter

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change
setting.

]

If you select “Information” on the network setting screen, the
current network setting appears. To return to the network setting
screen, press [BACK] after confirming.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

Initializing Internet Settings
[SETUP]

“Reset”

If you want to initialize the Internet settings, first you must reset the
Disklavier control unit to its initial factory setting.
However, cookies are still remain after parameter resetting. To delete
cookies, perform the appropriate operation on the reset screen.


For details on cookies, see Chapter
16 “Glossary” on page 139.


See Chapter 13 “Other Settings –
Resetting the Disklavier Control
Unit” on page 130.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Changing the Playback Tempo
[TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +]

Note:
You cannot change the playback
tempo of songs on audio CDs.

These tempo settings remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier control unit is turned off.



Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] on the remote control.

English

You can speed up or slow down the playback tempo. Slowing down the
playback tempo can be useful when practicing a difficult piano part.

Tempo changes to songs that you
have recorded yourself can be made
permanent. See Chapter 7
“Advanced Recording – Changing
the Default Tempo” on page 65.

The tempo setting screen appears.

=Memory=

TEMPO-/0/+

TEMPO +01%
2

Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] to adjust the tempo.

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to adjust the tempo.

Playback tempo can be adjusted from –50% to +50% in 1%
increments.
Press [TEMPO 0] to set to the original tempo.

Playing Back Songs in a Different Key (Transposition)
[TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +]

Playback can be transposed up or down by up to two octaves. This is
useful, for example, when you want to sing along (karaoke) in a different
key from the original recording.
Transposition changes remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier control unit is turned off.

Note:
This function cannot be used to
transpose songs from external
devices connected to the OMNI IN
jacks, or on audio CDs.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] on the remote
control.
The transposition setting screen appears.

=Memory=

TRANS-/0/+

TRANS +01key
2

Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] to change the
key.

Playback can be transposed in half-step increments up or down
two octaves (–24 key to +24 key).
Press [TRANSPOSE 0] to set to the original key.

Repeating Song Playback
[REPEAT]

There are three repeat modes (ALL, RPT, RND) as described below. You
can use these functions for entertainment or study purpose.
Repeat mode settings remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier control unit is tuned off.

Press [REPEAT] on the remote control.
The repeat setting screen appears.

=Memory=

REPEAT ALL

REPEAT

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to adjust the key.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Press [REPEAT] to select repeat modes.

The following options are available:
Description

ALL

Repeats all songs on the selected album.

RPT

Repeats selected song.

RND

Shuffles the order of songs on the selected album and
repeats the cycle.

OFF

Plays back songs normally.

Press [PLAY] to start repeat playback.

To cancel the repeat mode, press [REPEAT] until “OFF”
appears on the screen.

English

Option

Repeating a Specific Section of a Song (A-B Repeat)
During playback

[A-B]

In the A-B repeat, playback is repeated between two specified points in a
song: point A and point B. This function is useful when practicing or
memorizing a difficult section of a song.
Once specified, points A and B are saved until another song is selected,
recording is started, or the Disklavier control unit is turned off.

To set point A, play back a song and press [A-B] on the
remote control when the desired point is reached.
Point A is set.
The A-B repeat setting screen appears with the “B” flashing.

=Memory=

A-B

Flashes

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Note:
You cannot set point B that is
beyond the selected song.

To set point B, press [A-B] again.
Point B is set.

=Memory=

A-B

<02:22> A-B

Playback starts from point A, continues up to point B and, returns to
point A and playback starts repeatedly.
Point B

Point A
SONG 1

SONG 2

SONG 3

Start
Cycle

To cancel the A-B repeat, press [A-B] so that “OFF”
flashes on the screen.
=Memory=

A-B

Note:
The A-B repeat is cancelled if you
escape from the A-B repeat setting
screen by other operations.

Flashes

Pressing [BACK] also cancels the point setting, and returns to the
song playback screen.

Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part
[PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]

This could be useful, for example, when listening carefully to one part, and
also when you practice only the left- or right-hand part while the Disklavier
plays the other.

■ Cancelling the Piano Part


Select the desired song.

Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] on the
remote control to cancel a part.
The part cancellation screen appears with the corresponding part
canceled.

=Piano Part=

L/R

L=ON R=OFF P=ON

To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback
Notes of displays:

Note:
Guide part can be set on the models
capable of the SmartKey playback.

Display

Description

Left hand part

Right hand part

Pedal part

Plays part

OFF

Cancels part

Plays part with guide (only for SmartKey song)

---

No plays on part

Note:
For the SmartKey song, “ON”,
“OFF” and “G” appear sequentially
each time you press [PART
SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R].

English

To replay the cancelled part, press [PART SELECT L] or
[PART SELECT R] again so that “ON” appears on the
screen.
=Piano Part=

L/R

L=ON R=ON P=ON
4

Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen.

■ Cancelling the Pedal Part

On the part cancellation screen, press [
=Piano Part=

] to select “P=.”

L/R

L=ON R=OFF P=ON
2

Press [–/NO] to cancel a pedal part.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

To replay the pedal part, press [+/YES] to select “ON” with
the cursor is on “P=.”

Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen.

Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing,
Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback
[BALANCE]

Besides adjusting the overall volume, the volume balance among the
different sound sources as described below can be adjustable.
TG:

Adjusts the volume of the ensemble sound reproduced by the
tone generator (TG) of the Disklavier control unit.

Audio:

Adjusts the volume of the accompaniment or standard audio
sound pre-recorded in the software (CDs).

Voice:

Adjusts the volume of the ensemble voice when you play using
the voice function.

■ Adjusting the TG Balance

Note:
You cannot adjust the volume
balance during the DisklavierRadio
playback.


See Chapter 8 “Advanced Piano
Playing – Playing the Disklavier
with an Ensemble Voice” on
page 69.

Press [BALANCE] on the remote control.
The TG balance setting screen appears.

=BALANCE=

TG BALANCE 100
2

-/+

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the tone
generator.

Tone generator volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127.
48

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to adjust the volume.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

■ Adjusting the Audio Balance

Press [BALANCE] twice on the remote control.
The audio balance setting screen appears.

=BALANCE=

-/+

AUDIO BALANCE 100

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the
audio.

English

×2

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to adjust the volume.

Audio volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127.

■ Adjusting the Voice Balance

Press [BALANCE] three times on the remote control.
The voice balance setting screen appears.

=BALANCE=
×3

-/+

VOICE BALANCE 100

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the voice.

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to adjust the volume.

Voice volume can be adjusted in a range of 0 to 127.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Adjusting the Pitch of Audio
During playback

[FUNC.]

You can temporarily adjust the pitch of the song contains audio
(PianoSoft·PlusAudio, SmartPianoSoft) or an audio CD for your listening
pleasure.
Pitch adjustments are effective until another medium or album is selected,
recording is started, or the Disklavier control unit is turned off.

During the song playback, press [FUNC.] on the remote
control.
The audio pitch setting screen appears.

=CD=

-+ENT

AudioPitch=+00cent
2

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pitch.
=CD=

-+ENT

AudioPitch=+01cent
Audio pitch can be adjusted in a range of –50 cent to +50 cent (one
semitone as 100 cent).

Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio
During playback

[FUNC.]

You can temporarily adjust the L/R balance of an audio CD.
Balance adjustments are effective until another song is selected, recording
is started, or the Disklavier control unit is turned off.

During the song playback, press [FUNC.] several times.
The audio pan setting screen appears.

=CD=

-+ENT

AudioPan=Center

Note:
This function cannot be used to
adjust the pitch of external audio
CDs connected to the OMNI IN
jacks.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pan.
=CD=

-+ENT

AudioPan=Left
Option

Description

Left

Audio of the L channel is output to both of the L and R
channels.

Center

Audio of the L channel is output to the L channel, and the
R channel is output to the R channel.

Right

Audio of the R channel is output to both of the L and R
channels.

English

The following pan settings are available:

Using the Timer Play
[SETUP]

“TimerPlay”

You can program your Disklavier to start or stop playback of a song at
various specified times. All you need to do is register up to a maximum of
99 timer settings, and your Disklavier will perform them unattended. This
function is called “timer play.”
The following describes how to play back the first album in the internal
flash memory at 8:15 AM.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.

Note:
The internal calendar must be set in
advance in order for the timer play
to function. See Chapter 2 “Getting
Started – Setting the Internal
Calendar” on page 16.
Note:
The control unit must be turned on
in advance in order for the timer
play to function. The timer play
cannot turn on/off the control unit.

The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Select “TimerPlay” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The timer play setting screen appears.
Timer switch

=TimerPlay=
_?]-+
>TimerPlay=OFF
01[### ##:## ---]
Program Day Time Function Album
number
selection

Confirm that the cursor is on the timer switch, then press
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to switch the timer play on and off.
=TimerPlay=
-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[### ##:## ---]

Press [

] and [

] to select the desired program number.

You can scroll the screen up or down, and select the desired
program number.

Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the function
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
desired function.

=TimerPlay=
-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[### ##:## PLAY -----]

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

The following functions are available:
PLAY

Starts playback of songs.

STOP

Stops playback of songs.

RND

Starts playback of songs at random.

OFF

Turns off the Disklavier (standby mode).

Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album selection
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
desired album.
=TimerPlay=
-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[### ##:## PLAY Mem01]

The following selections are available:

Mem01 Mem99

Albums (01 - 99) in the internal flash memory.

Lst01 Lst99

Playlists (01 - 99) created in the internal flash memory.

Radio

The last DisklavierRadio channel you have listened to.

-----

Current selected song.

English

When “PLAY” or “RND” is selected, the album selection parameter
appears.
Note:
“Radio” is available only on models
of which the control unit is replaced
with the Disklavier control unit.
Note:
You cannot select “Radio” if you
select “RND” in step 5.
Note:
When “Radio” is selected, the
Disklavier will connect to the
Internet one minute prior to the time
you have set, and the channel
selection screen appears.
DisklavierRadio will begin to play
at the designated time.

Press [ ] to move the cursor to the day parameter, then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired day.
=TimerPlay=
_?=]-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[M-F ##:## PLAY Mem01]
The following day settings are available:
ALL

The timer play functions on every day of the week.

MON

The timer play functions only on Monday.

TUE

The timer play functions only on Tuesday.

WED

The timer play functions only on Wednesday.

THU

The timer play functions only on Thursday.

FRI

The timer play functions only on Friday.

SAT

The timer play functions only on Saturday.

SUN

The timer play functions only on Sunday.

M-F

The timer play functions on Monday thru Friday.

M-S

The timer play functions on Monday thru Saturday.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Press [ ] to move the cursor to the hour parameter, then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set hours.
=TimerPlay=
-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[M-F 08:00 PLAY Mem01]

Press [ ] to move the cursor to the minute parameter,
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set minutes.
=TimerPlay=
-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[M-F 08:15 PLAY Mem01]

Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu screen.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

■ About Song Playback Screen
When the song playback is stopped — with the timer play function is set to
ON and the current time is displayed — “T” flashes to the right side of the
current time.

Indicates that the timer play is on.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a Song
[SETUP]

“Playback”

When there is a blank part created at the beginning of the recorded song,
turning on this function automatically skips the unwanted part and starts
playback from the actual beginning of the song.
English

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “Playback” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SETUP MENU=
_(2/3)]
*Network
*Playback
*Shortcut
The playback setting screen appears with the cursor flashing.

=Playback=
>SkipSpace=OFF
>KeyMotion=ON

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the setting.
=Playback=
>SkipSpace=ON
>KeyMotion=ON

Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu screen.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

SmartKey™ Playback
Select a SmartKey song

[PLAY]

Special SmartKey software uses all the “SmartKey” features to create an
exciting way in which non-players can learn to play simple melodies, one
note at a time, without the need for written music. SmartKey software does
this by partially depressing the piano key to signal which note should be
played. The Disklavier then waits for you to press this key before it
continues to the next note in the melody (If you miss the movement of the
key, the Disklavier will repeat the movement until you press the key).
When you press the key, the Disklavier will reward you with ear tickling
phrases, incredible harmonies, and lush arpeggios to give you the aural
and visual image of a complete high-quality performance. In short, it
SHOWS you which key to play, WAITS for you to play that key before it
continues, and REWARDS you with music. It is like having an eternally
patient music teacher showing your fingers which notes to play.

Select a desired SmartKey song.

Press [PLAY].

Key moves slightly

The key to play flashes in the counter.

Pachelbel=s

Flashes

Play the key that the keyboard indicates.
This will continue until the song is finished. Notice that the
Disklavier patiently waits for you to play the right key before
proceeding to the next key. Also, notice that if you happen to miss
the cue, it will gently remind you what the key is every few seconds
until you play the right key.


To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.


Playback stops, and the key to play next moves slightly.

Note:
SmartKey playback is available only
when the control unit of models with
the SmartKey feature is replaced
with the Disklavier control unit.
Models capable of SmartKey
playback:
- Disklavier Mark III Series (DU1A)
- Disklavier Mark III Series FullFunction Models
- Disklavier Mark III Series
Standard Models
- Disklavier Mark III Series PRO
Models

To cancel the SmartKey playback,
see Chapter 6 “Advanced Song
Playback – Playing Back Only the
Desired Piano Part” on page 46.

Chapter

Advanced Song Playback

■ Key notation
As a reference, “C3” is middle “C”, which means “C4” is an octave above
middle “C” and so on.
C 2D 2

F 2G 2 A 2

C 3D 3

F 3G 3A 3 C 4

English

C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4

Middle C

Inactivating the Key Movement during Playback
During playback

[FUNC.]

During playback of a song, key normally move in accordance with the
playback of the respective note’s key. For models equipped with the Silent
Piano™ function, you can select an option of stopping this key movement
during the song playback with the Silent Piano™ function. This enables
you, for example, to play along with the song being played back, to add
your own improvisation, or to create a four-hand duet.

Note:
Key movement can only be
inactivated on models of which the
control unit is replaced with the
Disklavier control unit.
Note:
You can change the setting for key
movement from the “Playback”
option in the setup menu.

During the song playback with the Silent Piano™ function,
press [FUNC.] several times.
The key motion setting screen appears.

=Memory=

-+ENT

KeyMotion=ON

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the setting.
=Memory=

KeyMotion=OFF

-+ENT

Chapter

Advanced Recording
This chapter describes further functions for the advanced piano recording such as playing and
measuring the current playing song tempo with the metronome, recording the left-hand part
and the right-hand part separately.

Recording with the Internal Metronome
[METRONOME]

[RECORD]

You can use the metronome to record songs.
Songs recorded with the metronome will be in the measures and beats
format.
All metronome parameters are reset when the Disklavier control unit is
switched off.

Press [METRONOME] on the remote control.
The metronome setting screen appears.

=METRONOME=
-+
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER

To change the tempo, move the cursor to the tempo
parameter (“TEMPO”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

]

=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =4/4
VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER
The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm.

To change the beat, move the cursor to the beat parameter
(“”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER
The following beat settings are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4,
7/4, 8/4, 9/4.

Note:
The tempo parameter displayed on
the metronome setting screen
indicates the number of beats in a
minute, and one beat represents a
quarter. When you play a song
written in different measure unit
from quarter note, change the setting
(e.g. When playing a song in 3/2, set
beat to 6/4).

Chapter

Advanced Recording

To change the volume, move the cursor to the volume
parameter (“VOLUME”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

]

=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
English

The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.

To change the sound, move the cursor to the sound
parameter (“SOUND”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

]

=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME= SOUND=TG
The following sound settings are available: BUZZER, TG.

Press [RECORD] in the metronome setting screen.
The metronome recording setting screen appears.

=Memory=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME= SOUND=TG

Press [PLAY].

Recording begins immediately.
[PLAY/PAUSE], [REC] and [SELECT] on the front panel flash
simultaneously at the first beat of the metronome.

Start playing your song.

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.

The recorded song is loaded.
59

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately
[RECORD]

[FUNC.]

When recording an L/R song, the left- and right-hand parts can be
recorded separately. Either part can be recorded first, and the pedals can
be recorded with the first part.
While you record the second part, the first part will play back for
monitoring.
If the left-hand or right-hand part is difficult to play at normal speed, the first
part can be recorded at a slow tempo, and then the tempo changed
afterwards to record the second part at the normal song speed.
This section describes how to record the left-hand part first then the
right-hand part second.

■ Recording the Left-Hand Part

Select a destination medium and album.

Press [RECORD].


To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.



Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.

=Memory=

L=REC R=OFF
4

Make sure that the left-hand part is set to be recorded
(“L=REC”), then press [PLAY].

This Disklavier is now ready for you to play the left-hand part.

Start playing your song.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key.

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.

The L/R song with the left-hand part recorded is saved onto the
selected album.
Next, record the right-hand part overwriting the left-hand part that
you have just recorded.
60

In the case you want to title your
new song before recording, see
Chapter 4 “Basic Recording –
Titling a Song at the Start of
Recording” on page 33, to rename
the title after recording, see Chapter
11 “Media Management –
Renaming a Song” on page 88.


If you want to record your L/R song
using the metronome, see Chapter 7
“Advanced Recording – Recording
with the Internal Metronome” on
page 58.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Press [RECORD].

Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song with the lefthand part that you have just recorded, then press
[ENTER].

Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.

English

The part selection screen appears.

=Memory=

L=PLY R=OFF

The part that has already been recorded is displayed as “L=PLY.”

Press [PART SELECT R] to record the right-hand part.
=Memory=

L=PLY R=REC

The part set to “REC” will be recorded.

Press [PLAY].

Playback of the left-hand recorded part starts immediately, so be
sure that you are ready to play the right-hand part along with it.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The following screen appears.

=Memory=
ENT
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
Option

Description

SAVE

The second part is saved with the first part under the
current song number, overwriting the previously saved
first part.

NEW

The second part is saved under a new song number.
The first part is kept under the previous song number.

CANCEL The second part is discarded. The first part is kept
under the previous song number.

Press [ ] and [
[ENTER].

] to select an option, then press

The right-hand part is saved as indicated or canceled.

Recording the Left and Right Parts Together (Setting a Split Point)
[RECORD]

[FUNC.]

You can also record an L/R song by playing the left- and right-hand parts
simultaneously. In this case, a keyboard split point is set, and the notes
played on the left-hand side of the split point are saved as the left-hand
part, and notes played on the right-hand side of the split point are saved as
the right-hand part.

Select a destination medium and album.

Press [RECORD].

The part selection screen appears.

L=REC R=OFF

To select a medium or album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.



Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.

=Memory=




If you want to record your L/R song
using the metronome, see Chapter 7
“Advanced Recording – Recording
with the Internal Metronome” on
page 58.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Press [PART SELECT R] to set both parts to record.
The split point setting screen appears.

=Memory=

LR=REC SPLIT=C3

English

The above display shows that the default keyboard split point is
note C3, or middle C. In this case, note C3 and notes below are
saved as the left-hand part and notes above C3 are saved as the
right-hand part, as shown in the following figure.

Left-hand part

Right-hand part

To change the split point, press a key on the keyboard or
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a different key.
or

The split point can be set from note A-1 to note C7.

Press [PLAY].

The Disklavier is now ready for you to play.

Starts playing your song with the left- and right-hand parts
and the pedal part simultaneously.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key.

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.

The recorded song is loaded.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Re-recording One Part
[RECORD]

Select the L/R song

[PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]

You can re-record the only one part left-hand or the right-hand of the
existing L/R song.

Select a desired medium and album.

Press [RECORD].

Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song that you want to
re-record, then press [ENTER].

Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] to select the
part to re-record.

The part set to “REC” will be re-recorded.

Press [PLAY].

Recording will start immediately, so be sure that you are ready to
play the part.


To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The following screen appears.

=Memory=
ENT
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL

Option

Description

SAVE

The re-recorded part is saved with the other existing
part under the current song number, overwriting the
selected part.

NEW

The re-recorded part is saved under a new song
number. The existing parts are kept under the current
song number.

English

The following table gives a description of each of the options.

CANCEL The re-recorded part is discarded. The existing parts
are kept under the current song number.

Press [ ] and [
[ENTER].

] to select an option, then press

The re-recorded part is saved as indicated or canceled.

Changing the Default Tempo
[RECORD]

Select the song

[FUNC.]×3

This function allows you to change the default tempo of a song and save
the change. It should not be confused with the playback tempo function
described in Chapter 6 “Advanced Song Playback – Changing the
Playback Tempo” in which tempo changes are lost when the Disklavier
control unit is turned off.
The tempo of a song can be changed many times. This function can be
used when recording a very complex song that is difficult to play at a fast
tempo. First, record the song at a tempo you can manage, then change the
tempo afterwards. For example, you could record a difficult left-hand part
at a slow tempo, use this function to change the tempo, then record the
right-hand part at the normal tempo.
If a song’s time format is minutes and seconds, tempo changes are
specified as a percentage of the original tempo.
If a song’s time format is measures and beats, tempo changes are
specified in beats per minute.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Select a desired medium and album.

Press [RECORD].

Press [ ] and [ ] to select the song in which you want
to change the tempo, then press [ENTER].

Press [FUNC.] three times.


To select a medium or album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.

×3
For measures and beats, the current song tempo (bpm) is shown.

=Memory=
-+
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
For minutes and seconds, the current song tempo is shown as
“000%.”

=Memory=
TEMPO=+000%

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the tempo.

[+/YES] increases the tempo, and [–/NO] decreases the tempo.
For measure and beats, the tempo range is from 30 bpm to 400
bpm.
For minutes and seconds, the tempo range is from –75% to
+242%.

Note:
You cannot change the beat setting
on the prerecorded songs.

Chapter

Advanced Recording

Press [STOP] to save the tempo change.
The following screen appears.

=Memory=
ENT
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL

Option

Description

SAVE

The song is saved at its new tempo under the current
song number.

NEW

The song is saved at its new tempo under a new song
number. The original song is kept under the previous
song number.

English

The following table gives a description of each of the options.

CANCEL The song with a new tempo is discarded. The original
song is kept under the previous song number.

Press [

] and [

] to select an option, then press [ENTER].

To change the tempo again or to reset the original tempo, repeat
steps 1 to 6.

Chapter

Advanced Piano Playing

Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal Metronome
[METRONOME]

The internal metronome helps you playing along the meter (beat) and the
tempo you set. Also the volume of the metronome can be adjusted.

Press [METRONOME] on the remote control.
The metronome setting screen appears and the metronome starts
to click.

=METRONOME=
-+
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER

To change the tempo, move the cursor to the tempo
parameter (“TEMPO”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

]

=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =4/4
VOLUME=* SOUND=BUZZER
The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm.

Chapter

Advanced Piano Playing

To change the volume, move the cursor to the volume
parameter (“VOLUME”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

]

=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME= SOUND=BUZZER
English

The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.

To change the sound, move the cursor to the sound
parameter (“SOUND”) with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

]

=METRONOME=
_?=]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME= SOUND=TG
The following sound settings are available: BUZZER, TG

To cancel this function, press [METRONOME] again.

Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice
[VOICE]

The [VOICE] on the remote control lets you assign a voice from the internal
XG tone generator to accompany the piano while you play. You will hear in
unison the piano sound coming from the Disklavier and an ensemble voice
produced by the internal XG tone generator. This is sometimes referred to
as voice layering or unison.
The internal XG tone generator offers 480 instrumental voices and 11
drum kits for playing the keyboard.

Note:
You cannot use the voice function
on the playback model.


For details on voice groups and
voices, see Chapter 17 “Internal
Tone Generator Voices” on
page 142.

Press [VOICE] on the remote control.
The voice selection screen appears.

][

Chapter

Advanced Piano Playing

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a voice group.
Changing the voice group displays the top voice of that group in the
voice parameters.

][

To change the voice, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
voice parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].

][!"

If necessary, adjust the volume of the voice in the voice balance
setting screen.

To cancel this function, press [VOICE] again.


See Chapter 6 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 48.
Note:
The voice function is cancelled if
you escape from the voice selection
screen by other operations.

Chapter

Video Synchronization
You can record a song synchronized with the video, and enjoy a synchronized playback of
piano and video later on. This feature offers great listening experience with sight.

Video Synchronized Recording
[SETUP]

“AudioI/O”

Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder


For details on video synchronized
playback, see Chapter 9 “Video
Synchronization – Video
Synchronized Playback” on page 75.

English

By recording a song played on the Disklavier synchronized with the video
recording, later on, you can enjoy piano playback with the video. First set
up the camcorder, the DVD recorder, and the Disklavier control unit, and
then start recording by following the procedures below.

■ Setting for Video Synchronized Recording

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The audio I/O setting screen appears.

]

Select “OMNI IN” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to “Auto
Detect”.

]

Chapter

Video Synchronization

Select “OMNI OUT” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to
“SYNC”.

]),

][

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder to the Disklavier
control unit.
Camcorder
(for shooting)

DVD recorder
(for recording and playback)

TV
(for displaying)

To A/V output

To video
input

Video
connector
(yellow)
To video
input
A/V cord
(supplied with the
camcorder)

RCA cord
(not supplied)
Disklavier
control unit

To
video
output
To
audio
input

To audio
output
Video cord
(not supplied)
RCA cord
(not supplied)

Note:
Confirm the shape of input/output
connectors on the camcorder and the
DVD recorder, and prepare the
cables fit to them.

Chapter

Video Synchronization

■ Starting Video Synchronized Recording

Select a destination medium and album.

Press [RECORD].

To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.

English

The video synchronized recording standby screen appears, and
[RECORD] on the front panel lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE]
flashed in green.



=Memory=(SYNC) SO LR 99%
A01-005
<00:00>

(New Song)

Set the camcorder to video shooting mode.

Select the video input on the DVD recorder which the
camcorder is connected to, then start recording on the
DVD recorder.

Press [PLAY].
[PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing, and the counter starts to advance.

=Memory=(SYNC) SO LR 99%
A01-005
<00:00>

(New Song)

Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing
your song.
This step is necessary for synchronization of the song and the
video playback, and should not be omitted.

Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.

Stop recording on the DVD recorder.

Chapter

Video Synchronization

■ Using the Camcorder only
If your camcorder has both mic input and audio output, you can
perform video synchronized recording using the camcorder only.
1. Set the Disklavier control unit following the procedures 1 to 5 on
page 71.
2. Connect a camcorder to the Disklavier control unit.
Camcorder

To mic/line
input

To audio
output

RCA cord with
resistance
(not supplied)

RCA cord
(not supplied)

Disklavier control unit

3. Select a destination medium and album.
4. Press [RECORD].
5. Start recording on the camcorder.
6. Press [PLAY].
7. Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing your
song.
8. Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
9. Stop recording on the camcorder.

Chapter

Video Synchronization

Video Synchronized Playback
You can enjoy piano playback with the video recorded on the DVD
recorder.

Perform the video synchronized recording in advance.

Make sure that the OMNI IN setting is set to “AutoDetect”.

Turn down the volume completely on the TV if you
connect the audio output of the DVD recorder to the TV.



English

Note:
Be sure to rewind the video cassette
to locate the beginning of the
recording. It may take some time
before piano playback starts if you
start playback halfway through the
video.

See “Setting for Video
Synchronized Recording” on
page 71.

Turn down the volume completely on the camcorder if you use the
camcorder only.

Start playback on the DVD recorder.
Start playback on the camcorder if you use the camcorder only.
The Disklavier control unit automatically searches and selects the
song paired with the video, and then starts playback as well.

PIANO005.MID

If the piano playing is not synchronized with the video
Adjust the offset time for synchronization. See Chapter 12 “Enhancing the
Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices – Setting the Disklavier Control
Unit for Audio Data Reception/Transmission” on page 113.
If noises (synchronized signal) are heard during playback
Turn down the signal level and re-record. See Chapter 12 “Enhancing the
Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices – Setting the Disklavier Control
Unit for Audio Data Reception/Transmission” on page 113.

Note:
When using the song copied to the
USB flash memory, it may take
some time until the Disklavier
control unit recognizes the
information for synchronization.
Note:
When searching for songs for video
synchronized playback from a USB
flash memory, you can search from
a maximum of 150 songs per USB
flash memory. It is therefore
recommended that you copy songs
for video synchronized playback
onto the internal memory. When
saving onto a USB flash memory, it
is recommended that you do not
exceed a total of 150 saved songs
per memory.
Note:
You cannot operate the Disklavier
using the front panel or remote
control during video synchronized
playback. If you want to stop
playback of the song, stop playback
on the DVD recorder (or the
camcorder).

Chapter

CD Synchronization
You can record a piano performance along with the playback of songs on commercially
available CDs. Once you record a song with this feature, later on, you can enjoy piano
playback along with the played back songs on the CD.

CD Synchronized Recording
Insert an audio CD

[RECORD]

You can record a Disklavier piano performance along with the playback of
songs on commercial CDs.

Select a destination medium and album, then song in the
selected album.

Insert an audio CD and select the song that you want to
synchronize with.

Press [RECORD].

Note:
The Disklavier control unit
recognizes the destination album by
selecting the song in it. Note that the
selected song is not overwritten by
this procedure.


To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 22.

The SPS recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the
front panel lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green.

=Memory=(SPS)
A01-038
<00:00>

LR 99%

(New Song)

Select the desired part of a song, then press [PLAY] to
start synchronizing.

Recording begins with the CD playback.

Start playing the Disklavier along with the CD playback.

Press [STOP] to stop recording.

The recorded song is loaded.


To play back the performance
recorded with this feature, see
Chapter 10 “CD Synchronization –
Adding Disklavier Accompaniment
to Commercial CD Songs
(PianoSmart™ Playback)” on
page 77.

Chapter

CD Synchronization

Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial CD Songs
(PianoSmart™ Playback)
Insert a CD

Select a SmartPianoSoft song

[PLAY]

Insert a desired CD that you want to synchronize with the
SmartPianoSoft song.

Select a desired SmartPianoSoft song.

Press [PLAY].

English

You can add a Disklavier piano performance you recorded or on
commercially available SmartPianoSoft software to the playback of songs
on your favorite CDs.


To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

Playback begins with the CD playback.

=Memory=
A01-038
<00:03> My

(SPS)V+00

Favorite

Chapter

Media Management
This chapter describes how to manage contents inside the media, such as managing albums,
songs and playlists.

Managing Albums
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

You can use the album function menu for creating, deleting and copying
albums inside a medium.

Press [FUNC.] in the album selection screen.


To select a album, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

The album function menu screen appears.

(1/2)
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum

Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].

]

Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.


About playlists, see Chapter 11
“Media Management – Managing
Playlists” on page 93.

The following functions are available:
- CopyAlbum
- DeleteAlbum
- NewAlbum
- RenameAlbum
- SortAlbum
- AddToPList
- DeleteList
- NewList
- RenameList

Making Copies of Albums
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“CopyAlbum”

You can make copies of the album to the different medium.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].

Note:
Up to 99 albums can be saved in a
medium.

Chapter

Media Management

Select “CopyAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The CopyAlbum screen appears.

English

{

Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
!

{

3a To copy to the new album, press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

!" #

{

3b To add to the existing album, press [

] to move the
cursor to the album, and press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to
select the album, then press [ENTER].

{

“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

{

Chapter

Media Management

Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CopyAlbum=
Executing...

=CopyAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.

Deleting Albums
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“DeleteAlbum”

You can delete the albums.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and
[FromToPC].

Select “DeleteAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The DeleteAlbum screen appears.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

Press [+/YES] to delete the album, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteAlbum=
Executing...

=DeleteAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.

ANY

Chapter

Media Management

Creating a New Album
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“NewAlbum”

You can create a new album into the selected medium.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1] and [USB2].

Select the “NewAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].

Note:
If you enter the same title as the
album already exists, the new album
is titled in the form of “album title
xx” (“xx” indicates the number).

English

Note:
Up to 99 albums can be created in a
medium.

(1/2)
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The NewAlbum screen appears.

ENT

=NewAlbum=
03:(no title)

Press [ENTER].
The album title editing screen appears.

=NewAlbum=

[A-Z]

Enter a title to a new album.
=NewAlbum=
Pops

[a-z]

You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 34.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

Chapter

Media Management

Press [+/YES] to create a new album, [–/NO] to cancel.
=NewAlbum=
Executing...

=NewAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.

Renaming an Album
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“RenameAlbum”

You can rename the albums which already named.
This function is available only for albums on [Memory].

Select “RenameAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The RenameAlbum screen appears.

Press [ENTER].
The album title editing screen appears.

Chapter

Media Management

Enter a new title to the selected album.
=RenameAlbum=
Jazz Selection

[a-z]

You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 34.
English

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
=RenameAlbum=
Executing...

=RenameAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return the album selection screen.

Chapter

Media Management

Rearranging the Order of Albums
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“SortAlbum”

You can rearrange the order of albums that you selected.
This function is available only for albums on [Memory].

Select “SortAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].

}

The SortAlbum screen appears.

=SortAlbum=
ENT
06:Favorite Latin Select
07:Free Flight

Press [ ] and [
position.

] to move the albums to the desired

=SortAlbum=
ENT
06:Favorite Latin Select
07:Free Flight

=SortAlbum=
ENT
07:Free Flight
06:Favorite Latin Select

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=SortAlbum= OK? YES/NO
08:Mike Garson Trio-Live
06:Favorite Latin Select

Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel.
=SortAlbum=
Executing...

=SortAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
84

ANY

Chapter

Media Management

Managing Songs
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

You can use the song function menu for managing the copy or the deletion
songs inside the album.

Press [FUNC.] in the song selection screen.

To select the song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

English



The song function menu screen appears.

(1/2)
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong

Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].

]

Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Note:
If there is no available function or
no song, the song function menu
screen does not appear although
pressing [FUNC.].


The following functions are available:
- CopySong
- DeleteSong
- RenameSong
- SortSong
- AddToPList
- ConvertSong
- Counter
- Strip XP

About playlists, see Chapter 11
“Media Management – Managing
Playlists” on page 93.

Making Copies of Songs
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“CopySong”

You can copy songs stored on an album to another.
This function is available for song in the album on [Memory], [CD](CDROM), [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC].

Note:
Copy-protected songs, such as
PianoSoft songs, cannot be copied to
a removable medium.
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be saved in an
album.

Chapter

Media Management

Select “CopySong” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
(1/2)
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The CopySong screen appears.

}{

a
{

Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=CopySong=
001:MoaArt
{USB1
>01:/

}{-+ENT

Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album, and press
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a destination album.
}{-+ENT
=CopySong=
001:MoaArt
{USB1 >02:/MyFolder

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

a
{

Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CopySong=
Executing...

=CopySong=
Completed.
Press any button.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

ANY

Chapter

Media Management

Deleting Songs
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“DeleteSong”

You can delete songs stored on an album.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2], [Playlist] and [FromToPC].

Select “DeleteSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].

English

(1/2)
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The DeleteSong screen appears.

ENT

=DeleteSong=
001:Mo=Art

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

Press [+/YES] to delete the song, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteSong=
Executing...

=DeleteSong=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

Chapter

Media Management

Renaming a Song
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“RenameSong”

You can rename the songs which already named.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].

Select “RenameSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The RenameSong screen appears.

ENT

=RenameSong=
006:Toccata

Press [ENTER].
The song title editing screen appears.

=RenameSong=
Toccata

[A-Z]

Enter a new title to the selected song.

You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 34.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=RenameSong= OK? YES/NO
006:Toccata and Fugue

Chapter

Media Management

Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
=RenameSong=
Executing...

=RenameSong=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

English

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

Rearranging the Order of Songs
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“SortSong”

You can rearrange the order of songs in an album.
This function is available only for songs in the album on [Memory] and
[Playlist].

Select “SortSong” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
(1/2)
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The SortSong screen appears.

=SortSong=
ENT
006:Toccata and Fugue
007:Admiration

Press [ ] and [
position.

] to move the songs to the desired

=SortSong=
ENT
006:Toccata and Fugue
007:Admiration

=SortSong=
ENT
007:Admiration
006:Toccata and Fugue

Chapter

Media Management

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=SortSong= OK? YES/NO
008:Interaction
006:Toccata and Fugue

Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel.
=SortSong=
Executing...

=SortSong=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

Converting Song Format
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“ConvertSong”

The song format can be converted to other format.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].

Select “ConvertSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].

}

The ConvertSong screen appears.

-+ENT
=ConvertSong=
001:Song For Students
SMF0
E-SEQ

Note:
The converted song will be newly
added to the end of the album.

Chapter

Media Management

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a song format.
-+ENT
=ConvertSong=
001:Song For Students
SMF0
Piano1

English

The following options are available:
Option

Song Format

E-SEQ

E-SEQ format

SMF0

SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0

SMF1

SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1

Piano1

E-SEQ format to play on all Disklavier in correct tempo

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=ConvertSong=OK? YES/NO
001:Song For Students
SMF0
Piano1

Press [+/YES] to convert, [–/NO] to cancel.
=ConvertSong=
Executing...

=ConvertSong=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

Changing the Counter Display
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“Counter”

The counter display of a song can be changed from “measures and
beats”(metronome) to “minutes and seconds” or vice versa.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].

Chapter

Media Management

Select “Counter” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].

}

The CounterChange screen appears.

ENT
=CounterChange=
001:Song For Students
TIME
METRONOME
TIME: minutes and seconds display
METRONOME: measures and beats display

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=CounterChange=OK?YES/NO
001:Song For Students
TIME
METRONOME

Press [+/YES] to change, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CounterChange=
Executing...

=CounterChange=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form (Strip XP)
Song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“Strip XP”

Some Disklavier pianos record highly precise control information (XP
events) that becomes part of the MIDI song files. This data is used to
achieve accurate playback on the Disklavier PRO model, but is not used
when the file is played back on general MIDI devices. When you edit the
song with external MIDI devices (for example a software sequencer), the
relationship between the note data and the XP event as well as the actual
performance may not be maintained. There may be cases in which songs
edited in this manner cannot be played back normally, depending on the
instrument’s settings. In such cases, use the Strip XP function to remove
the XP event to convert the song to standard MIDI format before using it
for playback. Strip XP also makes it possible to reduce the size of MIDI
files when desired.

Note:
Once the XP event is stripped, the
original data cannot be restored.
Before converting valuable music
data, be sure to backup the original
data.

Chapter

Media Management

Select “Strip XP” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].

}

The Strip XP screen appears.

English

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

Press [+/YES] to execute, [–/NO] to cancel.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.

Managing Playlists
By creating lists of your favorite songs, you can program your Disklavier to
automatically play back a series of songs.
At the initial factory settings, no playlist is created in the internal flash
memory. First create your own playlist, then play back that list.


To create a playlist, see Chapter 11
“Media Management – Creating a
New Playlist” on page 96.

Chapter

Media Management

Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist
Album or song selection screen

[FUNC.]

“AddToPList”

This function is available only for songs/albums on [Memory].

Note:
Up to 999 songs can be added to a
playlist.

Select “AddToPList” in the album or song function menu,
then press [ENTER].

}

Note:
You cannot add songs on media
other than [Memory] directly to the
playlist. First, copy songs to the
internal flash memory.

The AddToPList screen appears.

{

Note:
If “NewPlaylist” is selected in step
2, the title of added album is copied
to that playlist.

Select a destination playlist with [+/YES] and [–/NO].

Note:
If you select “New Playlist” and add
songs to it, the playlist is titled as
“My Playlist.”

Note:
The new playlist created in this
procedure can be selected from
“Playlist” in the media selection
screen.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

{

Press [+/YES] to add, [–/NO] to cancel.
=AddToPList=
Executing...

=AddToPList=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album or song selection screen.

Chapter

Media Management

Deleting a Playlist
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“DeleteList”

You can delete the playlists which already registered.

Select “DeleteList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
(1/1)
=ALBUM MENU=
*DeleteList *NewList
*RenameList

English

Note:
Even if you delete the playlist, songs
or albums added to that playlist
remain in the internal flash memory.

The DeleteList screen appears.

ENT
=DeleteList=
02:My Best Collection

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=DeleteList= OK? YES/NO
02:My Best Collection

Press [+/YES] to delete the playlist, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteList=
Executing...

=DeleteList=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.

Chapter

Media Management

Creating a New Playlist
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“NewList”

You can create a new playlist for playing back your favorite songs in your
selected order.

Select “NewList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
(1/1)
=ALBUM MENU=
*DeleteList *NewList
*RenameList
The NewList screen appears.

ENT

=NewList=
03:(no title)

Press [ENTER].
The playlist title editing screen appears.

=NewList=

[A-Z]

Enter a title to a new playlist.
=NewList=
My Best

[a-z]

You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 34.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=NewList=
OK? YES/NO
03:My Best Collection

Note:
Up to 99 playlists can be created.

Note:
If you enter the same title as the
playlist already exists, the new
playlist is titled in the form of
“playlist title [xx]” (“xx” indicates
the number).

Chapter

Media Management

Press [+/YES] to create a new playlist, [–/NO] to cancel.
=NewList=
Executing...

=NewList=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

Note:
The new playlist created in this
procedure can be selected from
“Playlist” in the media selection
screen.

English

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.

Renaming a Playlist
Album selection screen

[FUNC.]

“RenameList”

You can rename a playlist which already registered.

Select “RenameList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
(1/1)
=ALBUM MENU=
*DeleteList *NewList
*RenameList
The RenameList screen appears.

ENT
=RenameList=
My Best Collection

Press [ENTER].
The playlist title editing screen appears.

Enter a new title to the selected playlist.

You can enter up to 64 characters.
Follow the instructions in “Entering Characters” on page 34.

Chapter

Media Management

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=RenameList= OK? YES/NO
My Best Hit Collection

Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
=RenameList=
Executing...

=RenameList=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.

Managing Media
Media selection screen

[FUNC.]



You can use the media function menu for copying or deleting entire
contents inside the media.

To select a media, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

Press [FUNC.] in the media selection screen.
The media function menu screen appears.

=MEDIA MENU=
*CopyAll
*DeleteAll

Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].

]

Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Note:
If there is no available functions, the
media function menu screen does
not appears although pressing
[FUNC.].

The following functions are available:
- CopyAll
- DeleteAll
- Format
- Refresh

Chapter

Media Management

Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a Medium
Media selection screen

[FUNC.]

“CopyAll”



The function is available for [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1], [USB2]
and [FromToPC].

To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

Select “CopyAll” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].

English

You can copy the entire contents in a medium to the another medium.

=MEDIA MENU=
*CopyAll
*DeleteAll

The CopyAll screen appears.

=CopyAll=
USB1
Memory

Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=CopyAll=
USB1
Memory

-+ENT

Note:
Confirm that the destination
medium has enough space to store
the contents.

-+ENT

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=CopyAll=
OK? YES/NO
USB1
Memory

Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CopyAll=
Executing...

=CopyAll=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

Note:
If the maximum number of the
albums in the destination medium
exceeds 99, copying stops.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.

Chapter

Media Management

Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium
Media selection screen

[FUNC.]

“DeleteAll”



You can delete the entire contents in a medium.
This function is available for [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC].

Select “DeleteAll” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
=MEDIA MENU=
*CopyAll
*DeleteAll

The DeleteAll screen appears.

ENT

=DeleteAll=
Media=Memory

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=DeleteAll= OK? YES/NO
Media=Memory

Press [+/YES] to delete, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteAll=
Executing...

=DeleteAll=
Completed.
Press any button.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.

100

ANY

To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

Chapter

Media Management

Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to the Disklavier
Control Unit
You can copy song files from a Windows or Macintosh computer to a
special folder on the Disklavier control unit called [FromToPC] and then
play them on the Disklavier.

Connect the Disklavier control unit to a LAN (local area
network) to which a personal computer with a song file is
also connected.
Personal computer

Router
LAN

Disklavier control unit

Note:
Do not copy the files other than
Disklavier song files.

English

Note:
Copy-protected files, such as
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs,
cannot be copied to the [FromToPC]
folder.

Note:
Do not access the [FromToPC]
folder while Disklavier control unit
is engaged in another operation
(such as file copying or deleting).
Note:
It is necessary to configure the
Disklavier control unit properly for
network communications by
enabling it to get a DHCP IP address
automatically (recommended) or by
assigning an appropriate address
manually. The procedure is the same
as the one used for setting up the
Disklavier control unit for Internet
communications. Please follow the
instructions in Chapter 5 “Internet
Direct Connection (IDC) – Setting
the Disklavier Control Unit for the
Internet Connection” on page 41.
Note:
Use an STP (shielded twisted pair)
cable for connection. For details, see
Chapter 5 “Internet Direct
Connection (IDC) – Connecting the
Disklavier to the Internet” on
page 35.
Note:
For information about configuring a
personal computer for network
communications, please refer to the
documentation that came with the
computer.

101

Chapter

Media Management

■ For Windows

On the computer screen, click [Start] and then select [My
Network Places].
The [My Network Places] window appears. Confirm that the
[Dkv******] icon is shown in the [My Network Places] window.

Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier control unit.
Note:
The folder or icon name differs
depending on the version of your
operating system.

Double-click the [Dkv*******] icon.
The [Dkv*******] folder opens. Confirm that the [FromToPC] icon is
shown in the [Dkv******] folder.

Double-click the [FromToPC] icon.
The [FromToPC] folder opens.

Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.

Refresh the contents in the folder.

■ For Windows: In case that you cannot find
the [Dkv******] icon
1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen.
3. Select “Information” to display the information of network
settings.
4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and
memorize that name.
5. Open the [My Network Places] on the computer, and then click
the [Search] icon on the top of the window.
6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the [Computer name] box,
and then click [Search] to start searching.
7. Open [Dkv******] and confirm that the [FromToPC] folder is
shown under that.
8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.

102


See Chapter 11 “Media
Management – Refreshing the
Contents in [FromToPC]” on
page 105.

Chapter

Media Management

■ For Mac OS X 10.3 or 10.4

Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then click the
[Network] icon in the left side of the window.
The [Network] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv] icon is
shown in the [Network] window.

Click the [Dkv] icon.

Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier control unit.

English

The [Dkv] folder opens. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is shown
in the [Dkv] folder.

Click the [Dkv******] icon.

In the first dialog that appears, select [FromToPC] from
the mini-menu and click [OK].

Click [OK] again in the next dialog that appears.

Note:
If the user ID and password are
required during the process, enter
any name for the ID and leave the
space for the password blank.

Connection process completes and the [FromToPC] icon appears
in the left side of the window.

Click the [FromToPC] icon.
The [FromToPC] folder opens.

Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.

Refresh the contents in the folder.


See Chapter 11 “Media
Management – Refreshing the
Contents in [FromToPC]” on
page 105.

103

Chapter

Media Management

■ For Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6

Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then select [Go]
and then [Network] from the menu bar.

Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier control unit.

The [Network] window appears. Confirm that the [Dkv******] icon is
shown in the [Network] window.

Click the [Dkv*******] icon.
The [Dkv*******] folder opens. Confirm that the [FromToPC] icon is
shown in the [Dkv******] folder.

Note:
If the user ID and password are
required during the process, enter
any name for the ID and leave the
space for the password blank.

Click the [FromToPC] icon.
The [FromToPC] folder opens.

Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.

Refresh the contents in the folder.

■ For Macintosh: In case that you cannot find
the [Dkv******] icon
1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen.
3. Select “Information” to display the information of network
settings.
4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and
memorize that name.
5. Select [Go] and then [Connect to Server] from the menu bar on
the computer.
6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the address field, and
then click [Connect]. Use syntax “smb://” when entering the
name (“smb://Dkv******”).
7. Select [FromToPC] from the mini-menu in the first window
appears and click [OK]. Click [OK] again in the next window that
appears.
8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder on the left
side of the finder window.

104


See Chapter 11 “Media
Management – Refreshing the
Contents in [FromToPC]” on
page 105.

Chapter

Media Management

Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]
Select the [FromToPC]

[FUNC.]

“Refresh”

You must refresh the contents in the [FromToPC] folder after copying song
files from a personal computer, in order to play them on the Disklavier.

Select “Refresh” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].

To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.

English



The Refresh screen appears.

ENT

=Refresh=
Media=FromToPC

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=Refresh=
OK? YES/NO
Media=FromToPC

Press [+/YES] to refresh, [–/NO] to cancel.
=Refresh=
Executing...

=Refresh=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.

105

Chapter

Media Management

Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional)
Select the floppy disk

[FUNC.]

“Format”

In the case of using the unformatted floppy disk on the floppy drive
(optional) or deleting the entire contents on the floppy disk, format the
floppy disk.

Connect the floppy drive (optional) to the USB port on the
control unit.

Insert a floppy disk to the floppy drive.

Select “Format” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].

The Format screen appears.

ENT

=Format=
Media=FD

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=Format=
Media=FD

OK? YES/NO

Press [+/YES] to format, [–/NO] to cancel.
=Format=
Executing...

=Format=
Completed.
Press any button.

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.

106

ANY

Important:
Formatting a floppy disk erases all
data that stored in the disk, so make
sure that the disk you are going to
format does not contain the data you
want to keep.


To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 22.
Note:
If you are formatting a floppy disk,
make sure that the floppy disk’s
erasure protection tab is set to
“unprotected.”

Chapter

Media Management

■ Floppy Disk Accidental Erasure Protection
Floppy disks have an erasure protection tab located on the reverse side of
the disk in the bottom right-hand corner. When formatting a disk, make
sure that its erasure protection tab is set to “unprotected.”
Protected

English

When the tab window is open,
formatting and recording are
not possible.

Unprotected

When the tab window is closed,
formatting and recording are
possible.

Making Backups of Songs
[SYSTEM]

“Backup”

You can make a backup copy of the songs and playlists. In order to protect
your valuable music data, Yamaha strongly recommends that you backup
your memory on regular basis.
If the floppy disk is inserted to the optional floppy disk drive, eject it before
you start making backups.

Connect an external USB medium to the USB port on the
control unit.

Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.

Note:
Be sure to use the USB medium
described in Chapter 2 “Getting
Started – Compatible Media Format
for the Removable Media” on
page 19.
Note:
Make sure that the USB medium has
enough space to save the backup
data.

The system menu screen appears.

!"#$%{

107

Chapter

Media Management

Select “Backup” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

!"#$%{

The Backup screen appears.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=Backup=
OK? YES/NO
Backup song data?

Press [+/YES] to make a backup, [–/NO] to cancel.

=Backup=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu screen.

Press [SYSTEM] to exit from the system menu.

Restoring the Backups
[SYSTEM]

“Restore”

You can restore the current condition of the internal memory to the
previous condition that you made a backup copy.

Connect an external USB medium in which you made
backup last time to the USB port on the control unit.

Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.

!"#$%{

108


To make a backup, see Chapter 11
“Media Management – Making
Backups of Songs” on page 107.

Chapter

Media Management

Select “Restore” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

!"#$%{

English

The Restore screen appears.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=Restore=
OK? YES/NO
Restore this data?
Date:2007-10-22 15:42:00

Press [+/YES] to restore, [–/NO] to cancel.

=Restore=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu screen.

Press [SYSTEM] to exit from the system menu.

109

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking
Up Other Devices

Hooking Up Audio Equipment
If you connect the Disklavier control unit to an audio system, you can hear
the sound played/played back on the Disklavier from the connected audio
system, and the sound played back on the connected audio system from
the Disklavier.
AV amplifier

CD player, etc.

To audio
inputs

To audio
outputs

RCA cord
(not supplied)

Disklavier control unit

110

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Connecting Monitor Speakers
By connecting monitor speakers, you can listen to the internal XG tone
generator voices or audio from the external audio equipment connected to
the OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks from monitor speakers. Connection methods
vary depending on whether your piano is equipped with the Silent Piano™
function or not.
English

■ Connecting Optional Monitor Speakers Directly
to the Disklavier Control Unit
If your piano is not equipped with the Silent Piano™ function,
connect monitor speakers following the procedures below.
AC wall outlet

Monitor
speaker (left)

Monitor
speaker (right)
POWER
ON

OFF

POWER

POWER
ON

INPUT

LINE 1
(--10dB)

OFF

LINE 2
(--4dB)

PARALLEL

Audio cable
(supplied)

Disklavier control unit

Connect the INPUT LINE2 jacks on the rear of the monitor
speakers and the OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of the
Disklavier control unit with the supplied audio cables (pin
plug – phone plug).

Connect the power cables of the monitor speakers to the
AC wall outlet.

Turn on the POWER switches of the monitor speakers.
The monitor speakers are turned on.

111

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

■ In Case that You are Using Monitor Speakers for
Your Piano
If your piano is eqipped with the Silent Piano™ function, connect
monitor speakers following the procedures below.
If you have already connected monitor speakers to your piano, connect the
AUX IN jacks of your piano to the OUTPUT jacks of the rear panel of the
Disklavier control unit.

For models equipped with the control box
Connect your piano and the Disklavier control unit using the supplied audio
cable (pin plugs – stereo mini plug).

To AUX IN jack
(stereo mini plug)
Audio cable
(supplied)

Disklavier control unit

For models equipped with the amplifier
Connect your piano and the Disklavier control unit using the supplied audio
cables (pin plug – phone plug).

To AUX IN jacks
(phone plug)

Audio cables
(supplied)
Disklavier control unit

If you cannot find the AUX IN jacks on your piano, connect optional monitor
speakers following the procedures in “Connecting Optional Monitor
Speakers Directly to the Disklavier Control Unit” on previous page.

112

Note:
The shape of units or the location of
the AUX IN jacks varies depending
on the piano model.

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for Audio Data Reception/
Transmission
[SETUP]

“AudioI/O”

You can select the kind of the incoming/going out audio signals. The
following options should be set up in advance.
English

OMNI IN
Selects the appropriate option to match the incoming data input to the
OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks.
Auto Detect:
Select this when you make the Disklavier control unit detect the
input signal automatically.
Audio:

Select this when you play back an audio software on the
connected CD player, etc. and reproduce the sound from
optional monitor speakers.

OFF:

Select this when you cancel the data reception from the OMNI
(SYNC) IN jacks.

OMNI IN Vol
Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) IN
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127.

OMNI OUT
Selects the desired data to be output from the OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks.
Output:

Select this when you output the same audio signals as the
ones for the OUTPUT jacks.

SYNC:

Select this when you output the SMPTE signal used for video
synchronization playback.

OFF:

Select this when you cancel the data transmission from the
OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks.

OMNI OUT Vol
Adjust the volume of the outgoing audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) OUT
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127, or to “M-Volume.”
When you set to “M-Volume”, the OMNI OUT volume works with the main
volume.

ANALOG MIDI IN Vol

Note:
“M-Volume” is the next increment
on the OMNI OUT Vol setting
above 127.
OMNI OUT
Vol parameter
[–/NO]

000

Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the ANALOG MIDI IN
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127.

127

[+/YES]

M-Volume

113

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
A-MIDI IN Offset
For some display devices, the video images may be displayed a little bit
later than the piano playing when playing back the video synchronized
software that contains the analog MIDI signal. To eliminate this delay, you
can adjust the offset time that leads the actual playback of the piano. A
delay is applied to the incoming analog MIDI signal. The offset time can be
set in a range of –500 ms to 0 ms. Decrease this value to delay the piano
playing, and increase to advance the piano playing.

SYNC IN Offset
Adjusts the length of the offset time that leads the actual playback of entire
recording. The offset time can be set in a range of –500ms to +500ms.
Decrease this value to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance
the piano playing.

SYNC OUT Level
Adjusts the output level of the SMPTE signal. For normal use, the
adjustment of this option is not required. If noises (synchronized signal) are
output from the OUTPUT jacks during video synchronized playback, turn
down the level and re-record.

OUTPUT Offset
For some speakers or digital amplifiers, the audio from the Disklavier may
be output a little bit later than the acoustic piano playing. To eliminate this
delay, you can adjust the offset time for the sound output. This setting is
applied to the outgoing audio signal from the OUTPUT jacks and OMNI
(SYNC) OUT jacks. Decrease this value to advance the sound output. The
offset time can be set in a range of –100 ms to 0 ms. Decrease this value
to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance the piano playing.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The audio I/O setting screen appears.

]

114

][

]

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

][

]),

English

Hooking Up MIDI Devices
MIDI (an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows
electronic device (synthesizers, etc.) to interact and work in
synchronization with other MIDI compatible device. The Disklavier enables
you to enjoy a variety of MIDI features by connecting a MIDI device or
computer to the Disklavier control unit.

Note:
When you use the USB connection,
it is required to install the USB
driver to the connected device. In
such a case, visit the following
website and download the driver.
http://download.yamaha.com/

MIDI device (sequencer, synthesizer, etc.) or computer
Note:
Be sure to use the commercially
available MIDI cable with the Lshaped connector on the control unit
end.

To USB
port

USB cable
(not supplied)

To MIDI
input

To MIDI
output

Note:
If your piano is connected to the
Disklavier control unit with the
MIDI cables, you cannot use the
MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals
for connection with other MIDI
devices. Use the USB port for
connection.

MIDI cable
(supplied)

Disklavier control unit

115

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for MIDI Data Reception
[SETUP]

“MIDI”

The Disklavier can play back the MIDI data being received from the
connected MIDI device as well as the software loaded or stored in the
Disklavier control unit itself. The following options should be set up in
advance.

MIDI IN Port
Selects the terminal/port used for the data reception.
MIDI:

Select this when the MIDI device is connected to the MIDI IN
terminal.

USB:

Select this when the MIDI device is connected to the USB port.

Piano Rcv Ch
The MIDI data consists of multi channels that are respectively assigned to
a certain instrument’s part. This option assigns the desired channel(s) to
the piano part(s) that is (are) played back on the Disklavier’s keyboard.
01 thru 16: Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part.
1+2:

Select this when the “01” and “02” channels are assigned to the
piano parts.

Prg:

Select the smallest number channel assigned to the piano
group voice (see page 142) to be played on the Disklavier.

Prg(All):

Select all channels assigned to the piano group voice (see
page 142) to be played on the Disklavier.

MIDI IN Delay
When the Disklavier control unit receives two kinds of data (strong and
weak note) at the same time, the weak note sounds a little bit later than the
strong one due to the characteristics of the mechanism of the Disklavier
control unit. To eliminate this delay in the sound reproduction and the
notes are sounded in accurate timing at 500 millisecond after the data
reception, usually a delay is applied to the incoming MIDI data.

116

ON:

Select this when you apply this delay to the incoming MIDI
data.

OFF:

Select this when you do not apply this delay.

Note:
If you set the connection type setting
to “Add”, the MIDI IN Port setting
is fixed to “USB.” Note that you
cannot use the MIDI IN terminal as
MIDI IN Port.

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
English

Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].

][

]),

Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.

][

]),

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The MIDI setting screen appears.

]

117

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for MIDI Data Transmission
[SETUP]

“MIDI”

The Disklavier control unit can transmit the information of piano playing/
ensemble part playback on the Disklavier as the MIDI data to the
connected MIDI device to reproduce the sound with its sound generator,
etc. or to record the MIDI data. The following options should be set up in
advance.

MIDI OUT Port
Selects the terminal/port used for the data transmission.
MIDI:

Select this when the MIDI device is connected to the MIDI OUT
terminal.

USB:

Select this when the MIDI device is connected to the USB port.

MIDI OUT
Selects one of the following parts to be transmitted to the connected MIDI
device.
ESBL Out: Select this when you transmit the ensemble part played back
on the Disklavier.
KBD Out: Select this when you transmit the piano part played on the
Disklavier.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].
(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The MIDI setting screen appears.

]

118

][

]),

Note:
If you set the connection type setting
to “Add”, the MIDI OUT Port
setting is fixed to “USB.” Note that
you cannot use the MIDI OUT
terminal as MIDI OUT Port.

Note:
If you connected the playback
model and set the connection type
setting to “Replace”, the MIDI OUT
setting is fixed to “ESBL Out.”

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

][

]),

English

Setting the Disklavier Control Unit for Keyboard Playing Data
Transmission
[SETUP]

“MIDI”

Besides the MIDI OUT options, more detailed setups for the keyboard
playing data transmission are available. The following options should be
set up in advance.

KBD OUT CH
Assigns the piano part to the desired channels.
01 thru 16: Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part.

119

Chapter

Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].

][

]),

Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.

][

]),

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The MIDI setting screen appears.

]

120

Chapter

Other Settings

Tuning the Tone Generator (TG Master Tune)
[SETUP]

“M–Tune”

English

The internal XG tone generator has already been tuned to match the
acoustic piano (A3=440 Hz). However, you can re-tune the internal XG
tone generator in accordance with the pitch of the acoustic piano by
following the procedure below.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “M-Tune” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The TG Master Tune setting screen appears.

If you connected the playback model, the piano tone will sound
automatically on the XG tone generator. You can change the key of
this tone. Select “Note” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the key.

The following key settings are available: A-1, A0, A1, A2, A3, A4,
A5, A6.

121

Chapter

Other Settings

Playing the keyboard, press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to tune the
pitch of the internal XG tone generator.

The same note will sound simultaneously on the XG tone
generator’s digital piano and on the acoustic piano as soon as you
play the keyboard.
The pitch of the internal XG tone generator can be adjusted in a
range of –50 cent to +50 cent.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

Note:
To reset to the default factory pitch
settings, see Chapter 13 “Other
Settings – Resetting the Disklavier
Control Unit” on page 130.

Assigning Frequently-used Functions to the Number Keypad on
the Remote Control
[SETUP]

“Shortcut”

You can assign the number keypad of the remote control ([1] thru [9] and
[0]) a series of procedures for often used functions.

■ Assigning Functions

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)]
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

122

Chapter

Other Settings

Select “Shortcut” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SETUP MENU=
_(2/3)]
*Network
*Playback
*Shortcut

=Shortcut=
1[----2[-----

Press [

] and [

?-+
]
]

] to select the desired number.
=Shortcut=
3[----4[-----

English

The shortcut setting screen appears.

?=-+
]
]

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the desired function.
=Shortcut=
?=]-+
3[----]
4[PLAY Mem01 --- ]

Note:
“RADIO” is available only on
models of which the control unit is
replaced with the Disklavier control
unit.

The following functions are available:
Option

Description

PLAY

Starts playback of songs in the selected album or playlist.

RPT

Starts repeat playback of a song or songs in the selected
album or playlist.

RND

Starts playback of songs in the selected album or playlist
at random.

RADIO

Starts playback of the selected DisklavierRadio channel.

BLNC

Adjusts the volume balance among the different sound
sources (tone generator or audio).

POWER Turns on and off the Disklavier.
When functions other than “POWER” are selected, the detailed
setting parameter appears.

123

Chapter

Other Settings

Press [ ] to move the cursor to the detailed setting
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
desired setting.
You can set two sets of parameter depending on the function you
have selected.

=Shortcut=
_?=]-+
3[----]
4[PLAY Mem02 --- ]

When “PLAY” is selected:
Option 1

Option 2

Description

Mem01 Mem99

---

Starts playback from the first song in the
album selected for option 1.

001 - 999

Starts playback from the song selected for
option 2 in the album selected for option 1.

---

Starts playback from the first song in the
playlist selected for option 1.

001 - 999

Starts playback from the song selected for
option 2 in the playlist selected for option 1.

Lst01 Lst99

When “RPT” is selected:
Option 1

Option 2

Description

Mem01 Mem99

---

Starts repeat playback of all songs in the
album selected for option 1 from the first
song.

001 - 999

Starts repeat playback of the song selected
for option 2 in the album selected for option
1.

---

Starts repeat playback of all songs in the
playlist selected for option 1 from the first
song.

001 - 999

Starts repeat playback of the song selected
for option 2 in the playlist selected for
option 1.

Lst01 Lst99

When “RND” is selected:

124

Option

Description

Mem01 Mem99

Starts playback of songs in the selected album at
random.

Lst01 Lst99

Starts playback of songs in the selected playlist at
random.

Chapter

Other Settings

When “RADIO” is selected:
Option

Description

CH01 CH99

Starts playback of the selected DisklavierRadio channel.

When “BLNC” is selected:
Option 2

Description

Raises the volume of the tone generator.

DOWN

Lowers the volume of the tone generator.

Raises the volume of the audio.

DOWN

Lowers the volume of the audio.

AUDIO

English

Option 1

When “POWER” is selected:
Details settings are not required.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

■ Using the Shortcut
Holding the green button on the remote control, press the corresponding
number button on the number keypad to execute the assigned function.

125

Chapter

Other Settings

Setting the Passcode to Prevent Unauthorized Access
[SETUP]

“Passcode”

You can enter the 4-digit passcode to prevent unauthorized access from
the commercially available external remote controller, or you can also set
the MAC address of the external remote controller to allow it to access
your Disklavier without entering the passcode.

Note:
These settings are not required for
the use of the remote control of this
unit. In case of using an external
remote controller, refer to the user’s
guide for that remote controller.

■ Setting the Passcode

Note:
If changes are inappropriately made
for these settings, the external
remote controller may not function
properly. In such cases, enter
“####” to reset the passcode setting.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

=SETUP MENU=
(1/3)]
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “Passcode” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SETUP MENU=
_(3/3)
*Passcode *Reset
The passcode setting screen appears.

=Passcode=
>Passcode=####

]-+

Enter the 4-digit code with the number keypad.
=Passcode=
_?-+
>Passcode=1234
>MAdr1=##:##:##:##:##:##
You can move the cursor left and right with the cursor buttons
([ ] [ ]).
If you want to set the MAC address continuously, see “Setting the
MAC Address” and follow the instruction.

126

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

Note:
You can also use [+/YES] and
[–/NO] on the remote control, or the
dial on the front panel to enter the
code.

Chapter

Other Settings

■ Setting the MAC Address
If you feel inconvenient to enter the passcode each time you access from
the external remote controller, you can set the MAC address of the
external remote controller. This will allow the external remote controller
with the registered MAC address to access your Disklavier without
entering the passcode.

With the passcode properly set, press [
“MAdr1.”

English

] to select

=Passcode=
?=]-+
>Passcode=1234
>MAdr1=##:##:##:##:##:##

Enter the address with [+/YES] and [–/NO], or the number
keypad.

Note:
You can also use the dial on the
front panel to enter the address.

=Passcode=
_?=]-+
>Passcode=1234
>MAdr1=01:AB:23:C#:##:##

You can move the cursor left and right with the cursor buttons
([ ] [ ]).
You can set up to three addresses.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SETUP] to exit from the setup menu.

127

Chapter

Other Settings

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
[SETUP]

“Display”

You can adjust the brightness of the display. You can also set the display
to dim after the elapse of a certain time if there is no operation.

Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.

=SYSTEM MENU=
(1/2)]
*Clock Adj. *TimeZone
*Backup
*Restore

Select “Display” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SYSTEM MENU=
_(2/2)
*Language *PianoType
*Display
The display setting screen appears.

=Display=
?=-+ENT
*Brightness=100%
*Dim light=OFF

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the brightness.
=Display=
?=-+ENT
*Brightness=80%
*Dim light=OFF
The following brightness settings are available: 40%, 60%, 80%,
100%.

128

Chapter

Other Settings

Note:
The brightness of the display will
return to its original setting when
you press any buttons, insert media,
or eject media.

To set the time for the display to dim, press [ ] to move
the cursor to the dim light parameter, then press
[+/YES] and [–/NO].
=Display=
?=-+ENT
*Brightness=100%
*Dim light=1min.

English

The following time settings are available: OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min,
5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 45min, 60min.
If there is no operation for the time set above, the display dims to
half the brightness of its original setting.

Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.

Press [SYSTEM] to exit from the system menu.

Switching the Languages for the Screen
[SYSTEM]

“Language”

Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.

!"#$%{

Select “Language” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].

][

]

=SYSTEM MENU= _(2/2)
*Language *PianoType
*Display
The language setting screen appears.

=Language=
Language=English

-+ENT

129

Chapter

Other Settings

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the language.
-+ENT
=Language=
Language=Japanese

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

Press [+/YES] to set the language, and return to the
system menu screen.

Press [SYSTEM] to exit from the system menu.

Resetting the Disklavier Control Unit
[SETUP]

“Reset”

If you want to return your Disklavier control unit to its initial factory, follow
the procedure below.

Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.

(1/3)
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune

Select “Reset” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
=SETUP MENU=
(3/3)
*Passcode *Reset

The reset screen appears.

-+ENT
=Reset=
>Reset=Parameter

130

][

]

Important:
If you reset your Disklavier control
unit, depends upon the option what
you select, you may lose all
parameters or all data in the internal
memory, or both of these. For
normal use, you do not have to reset.
Necessarily case you have to reset
your Disklavier control unit,
Yamaha strongly recommends that
you backup your songs in the
internal memory. However, you
cannot backup your various
parameter settings.


To make a backup copy of the songs
which are in the internal memory,
see Chapter 11 “Media Management
– Making Backups of Songs” on
page 107.

Chapter

Other Settings

Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the option that you
want to reset.

Note:
Selecting “Factory Init.” will also
reset the piano type settings.

English

The following options are available:

Option

Description

Parameter

Reset all parameters, excluding the clock setting
and the Internet setting.

Memory

Reset the internal memory.

Factory Init.

Reset the Disklavier control unit to its initial
factory setting.

DeleteCookies

Delete the contents of all saved cookies.

Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.

=Reset=
OK? YES/NO
>Reset=Factory Init.

Press [+/YES] to reset, [–/NO] to cancel.
=Reset=
Executing...

=Reset=
Completed.
Press any button.

ANY

After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the setup menu screen.

Press [SYSTEM] to exit from the system menu.

131

Chapter

Other Settings

Updating the Disklavier Control Unit
Shut down the Disklavier control unit

[PLAY/PAUSE] and [ON/OFF]

You can update the Disklavier control unit firmware using update program
(saved on the CD-ROM or USB flash memory, or downloaded via Internet).
You can download the update program from the following website:
http://download.yamaha.com/

Make sure that Disklavier control unit is shut down.

Holding [PLAY/PAUSE] on the front panel, press [ON/OFF].

CTRL system v2.50
*UPDATE
(ENT)

Hold
The current version information of each module appears one after
the other.

Make sure that the update program is prepared, then press
[ENTER] on the front panel.
The starting screen appears.

Press [ENTER] on the front panel again.
After a while, the update confirmation message of each module
appears.

v2.50
] v3.10
MC -SURE? (PLAY,STOP)

132

Note:
For this operation you have to insert
the CD-ROM or USB flash memory
in which the update program is
saved or download update program
via Internet, and shut down the
Disklavier control unit.
Note:
Depending on the version or
specification of the Disklavier, the
actual indications for the version
and module names may differ from
ones depicted here.

Chapter

Other Settings

Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to start the update.
The update process of the first module takes approximately 3
minutes.

Attention:
DO NOT turn off this unit during
update.
Attention:
Be sure to update all the modules.

MC v2.50 ] v3.10
DO NOT REMOVE DISK!
English

When the update of the first module completes, the following
confirmation message appears.
Confirmation message of the second module

] v3.10
v2.50
CTRL-SURE? (PLAY,STOP)
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to start the update of the second module.
The update process of the second module takes approximately 3
minutes.
A total of three modules needs to be updated. Repeat this step to
complete the update.
Confirmation message of the third module

] v3.10
v2.50
APE -SURE? (PLAY,STOP)
The update process of the third module takes approximately 2
minutes.
The closing screen appears when the update for all modules
completes.

Restart the Disklavier control unit.

133

Chapter

Troubleshooting
If you are having difficulty operating the Disklavier control unit, see if any of the symptoms
listed below apply to your problem and follow the recommended remedy.

Power
Symptom
The Diskalvier does not turn on.

Remedy
Make sure that the AC adaptor is securely connected to
a suitable AC wall outlet.
If the Disklavier control unit still cannot be turned on,
disconnect it from the AC wall outlet, and consult your
Disklavier dealer.

Control Unit
Symptom
The control unit does not appear to work correctly.

The control unit becomes hot.

Remedy
Turn off the control unit, wait 5 seconds, then turn it
back on. If the problem continues, consult your
Disklavier dealer.
Although the chassis of the control unit may become
hot while it is turned on (also in the standby mode), this
is not a malfunction.

Remote Control
Symptom
Remedy
You cannot control the Disklavier control unit using the Make sure that you are pointing the remote control at
remote control.
the remote control sensor on the front panel.
Make sure that you are within the remote control’s
specified operating range (approx. 5 m).
Make sure that the remote control’s batteries have
been installed correctly.
Check the condition of the remote control’s batteries.

134

Chapter

Troubleshooting

Playback
Symptom
None of the playback functions can be used.

Remedy
Insert a medium that contains songs into the Disklavier
control unit.

If you have connected the Disklavier control unit and
the existing control unit with the MIDI cables, make
sure that they are connected with two MIDI cables for
input and output.

English

If you have connected the Disklavier control unit,
replacing with the existing control unit, make sure that the
D-SUB cable from your piano is firmly connected to the
Disklavier control unit via the supplied conversion cable.

Your piano is equipped with the thermostat. When the
built-in playback device is overheated due to prolonged
hard performance, song playback will be stopped
automatically. In such case, turn off your piano and
leave it unattended for a while to cool down the device.
The Disklavier control unit does not read a song file.

The maximum number of the readable files in an album
is 999.
Make sure that the name of the SMF song has an
extension as “.MID” or “.mid” and the E-SEQ song has
“.FIL” or “.fil.”
Make sure that you have selected the album including
the song you want to play back.

Songs are played back at the wrong tempo or in the
wrong key.

Reset the tempo or transposition changes. Once the
tempo or transposition have been changed, they will affect
playback of all songs on an album, until another medium or
album is selected, the recording standby mode is engaged,
the Disklavier control unit is turned off, or they are reset.

Songs are not played back in the normal song order.

Make sure that the random repeat mode is off.

The playback order differs from the order on another
device.

The playback order depends on the recording software
or other factors. Naming the file starting from numbers
such as 01, 02, etc. may solve the problem.

When selecting a song using the remote control’s number If a song number higher than the last song number on
keypad, but the last song on the album is selected.
the album is specified, the last song will be selected.
When specifying a search time using the remote control’s If a time value higher than the total length of the song is
number keypad, but the end of the song is selected.
specified, the end of the song will be selected.
Some notes drop out during playback.

When a piano song is played back at a low volume,
complex note trills and faint pianissimo passages
sometimes drop out. In such case, increase the volume
level of the Disklavier control unit.

PianoSmart™ playback cannot be performed.

Make sure that an appropriate SmartPianoSoft song, which
is paired with the song on commercial CDs, is selected.

The pedals do not operate during playback.

Make sure that the pedal part is not canceled.
Make sure that your piano is not in the Silent Piano™
function mode.

Tone Generator
Symptom
The ensemble parts cannot be heard during ensemble
song playback.
The pitch of your piano and the internal tone generator
do not match.

Remedy
Make sure that the TG balance is set to an appropriate
level and readjust it.
Use the TG Master Tune function to tune the internal
tone generator.
135

Chapter

Troubleshooting
Recording
Symptom
You cannot re-record.

Remedy
Re-recording is not possible on protected songs such
as PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs.

Media
Symptom
The Disklavier control unit does not read a CD-R/RW
disc.

Remedy
The audio CD should be formatted in CD-DA, and the
data CD in ISO 9660 Level1. The Disklavier control unit
may not read a CD-R/RW disc other than this format.

Connection with External Devices
Symptom
The Disklavier control unit cannot send or receive MIDI
data with other MIDI instruments.
A MIDI loop was accidentally created when you
connected a computer to the MIDI OUT terminal on the
Disklavier control unit, so that song data is sent back
and forth between the computer and the Disklavier.

Remedy
Make sure that the MIDI cables or USB cable are
connected properly.
Configure the setting for the MIDI OUT terminal to
“KBD OUT.”

Video Synchronized Recording/Playback
Symptom
Synchronized songs are not played back.

Remedy
Make sure that the audio channels of the DVD recorder
are correctly connected to the Disklavier control unit.
Make sure that the input and output of the DVD
recorder are correctly connected to the Disklavier
control unit.
Make sure that the “OMNI IN” option on the Disklavier
control unit is set to “AutoDetect.”
Make sure that the “OMNI OUT” option on the
Disklavier control unit is set to “SYNC.”
Noises are heard during recording.
Turn down the volume of the TV connected to the DVD
recorder.
Disconnect the left side connector of the RCA cord from
the OMNI OUT (L) jack on the Disklavier control unit.
This will not affect the functionality of video
synchronized recording.
Noises are heard during playback.
The level of the synchronized signal (SMPTE) from the
Disklavier control unit may be too high. Turn down the
level with the “SYNC OUT Level” option and re-record.
The piano playback is not synchronized with the video The video picture may be delayed on the projection
picture.
device. Adjust the offset time with the “SYNC IN Offset”
to match the piano playing and the video picture.
The beginning of the piano performance is dropped out It may take some time until the Disklavier control unit
when you play back the synchronized song.
recognizes the synchronized signal and the piano
begins to play back. Select the synchronized song in
advance, and then start playback on the DVD recorder.
Note that you should wait for a while before playing the
piano after recording begins on the DVD recorder.

136

Chapter

Error Messages
While operating your Disklavier control unit, an error message may appear in the display. If an
error message appears, refer to the table below for an explanation of the message.

Media Selection / Playback
Situation

Remedy

NO MEDIA!

You selected the medium that has not
been inserted.

Insert the medium or select another
medium.

DIFFERENT CD!

Your CD is not paired with the selected
SmartPianoSoft song.

Insert appropriate CD that is paired with
the SmartPianoSoft song.

Error Messages

Situation

Remedy

CANNOT USE THIS FUNCTION
PIANO TYPE

You tried to use the voice function on
the playback model.

You cannot use the voice function if
your piano is the playback model.

Error Messages

Situation

Remedy

CANNOT EXECUTE.
NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE

You tried to copy a song to the medium
that has no disk space.

Try another medium or delete songs on
the media to make disk space.

CANNOT EXECUTE.
NO DESTINATION MEDIUM

You selected the destination medium
that has not been inserted when
copying the album.

Insert the destination medium and
select it.

DISK WRITE PROTECTED!

You tried to copy songs or albums to
the medium with the protection tab set
to “protected”.

Set the protection tab of the medium to
“unprotected”.

CANNOT EXECUTE.
PROTECTED FILE

You tried to copy the protected song file
to the removable medium such as a
USB flash memory.

You cannot copy the protected file to
the removable medium.

Deleted all songs in this album

You tried to delete the album with sub
folders on the external medium.

CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE
MORE THAN 99 ALBUMS

You tried to create a new album on the
medium that already contains 99
albums.

No more than 99 albums can be created
on the medium.

CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE
MORE THAN 999 SONGS

You tried to create a new song in the
album that already contains 999 songs.

No more than 999 songs can be created
in the album.

CANNOT EXECUTE.
SAME TITLE EXISTS

You tried to rename an album as same
as the album that already exists.

Enter the different title to an album.

You tried to rename a playlist as same
as the playlist that already exists.

Enter the different title to a playlist.

Error Messages

Situation

Remedy

SELECT REC TRACK

You tried to start re-recording with no
part selected.

Select the part to record before starting
re-recording.

CANNOT RECORD.
PLAYBACK MODEL

You tried to record a song on the
playback model.

You cannot record a song if your piano
is the playback model.

English

Error Messages

Voice Function

File Operation

Recording

137

Chapter

Error Messages
Timer Play
Error Messages

Situation

Remedy

SAME TIME EVENT EXISTS!
CHANGE THE TIME

You tried to set two different programs
with the same time for timer playback.

You cannot set two different program
with the same time.

Error Messages

Situation

Remedy

CANNOT USE THIS FUNCTION
PIANO TYPE

You tried to use the Internet Direct
Connection on the piano connected to
the Disklavier control unit with the MIDI
cables.

Internet Direct Connection is available
only on models of which the control unit
has been replaced with the Disklavier
control unit.

Error Messages

Situation

Remedy

CANNOT USE THE MIDI PORT
PIANO TYPE

You tried to change the MIDI IN Port or
MIDI OUT Port settings on the piano
connected to the Disklavier control unit
with the MIDI cables.

If your piano is connected to the
Disklavier control unit with the MIDI
cables, these settings are fixed to
“USB” and you cannot change the
settings.

CANNOT USE THE KBDOUT
PLAYBACK MODEL

You tried to change the MIDI OUT
setting on the playback model of which
the control unit is replaced with the
Disklavier control unit.

If you replace the control unit of the
playback model with the Disklavier
control unit, this setting is fixed to
“ESBL Out” and you cannot change the
setting.

Internet Direct Connection

MIDI

138

Chapter

Glossary
This glossary provides basic definitions of terms used frequently in this manual.

General MIDI (GM)

See “Incremental Pedal.”

An addition to the MIDI standard that simplifies the
transfer of MIDI song files between instruments of
different manufacturers. A MIDI song recorded
using a GM compatible tone generator should play
back correctly when used with any GM compatible
tone generator. The standard specifies that a GM
compatible tone generator must support 24-note
polyphony, 16 parts, and 128 standard voices.

Cookie
A computer data file that stores certain information
for use when revisiting a website. In the case of the
Disklavier, cookies are used to store ID and
password for the IDC service.

DHCP
This is a standard or protocol by which IP
addresses and other low-level network
configuration information can be dynamically and
automatically assigned each time a connection is
made to the Internet.

DNS
A system that translates names of computers
connected to a network to their corresponding IP
addresses.

English

Continuous Pedal

Half Pedal
See “Incremental Pedal.”

Incremental Pedal
Piano pedals are not always completely up or down
and may be held somewhere in-between. Using
incremental pedal data (also called continuous or
half pedal data) the Disklavier precisely records the
up and down movement of the piano pedals.

Internet
Ensemble Song
A song which contains piano parts and
accompanying instrumental voices. An ensemble
song contains the same left- and right-hand parts
as an L/R song, and in addition, up to 13
accompanying instrument tracks. These extra
tracks are played by the internal XG tone
generator. The accompanying tracks may be used
for acoustic bass, drums, strings, vibes, etc.

A huge network made up of networks, the Internet
allows high-speed data transfer among computers,
mobile phones and other devices.

IP Address
A string of numbers assigned to each computer
connected to a network, and indicating the device’s
location on the network.

LAN
E-SEQ Song Format
A song file format developed by Yamaha for saving
songs.

Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer
network that connects a group of computers at a
single location (such as an office or home) by
means of a special cable.

Floppy Disk
The magnetic storage medium that the Disklavier
uses to save songs. With the optional USB floppy
drive, you can use the 3.5 inch 2DD and 2HD
floppy disks commonly used for computers.

Gateway
A system which links different networks or systems,
and makes possible data transfer and conversion
despite differing communications standards.

L/R Song
In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on
track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored
on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel
either part, and then play that part yourself. When
recording an L/R song, you can record the two
parts simultaneously or separately.

139

Chapter

Glossary
MIDI

Router

An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital
Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other.

A device for connecting multiple computer
networks. For example, a router is necessary when
connecting several computers in a house or office,
to allow all of them access the Internet and share
data. A router is usually connected between a
modem and a computer, although some modems
have a built-in router.

Modem
A device which connects and allows data transfer
between a conventional telephone line and a
computer. It converts the digital signals from the
computer to analog audio for sending over the
phone line, and vice versa.

Sequencer
A sequencer can be used with the Disklavier to play
back and record MIDI data.

Piano Parts
Refer to the left- and right-hand piano parts of a
song. The left-hand piano part is recorded onto
track 1 and the right-hand piano part is recorded
onto track 2.

Server

PianoSoft™

SmartPianoSoft™

The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a library of
prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha
specifically for use with the Disklavier.

Software made by Yamaha containing MIDI signals
for playing back along with standard audio CDs.

A hardware system or computer used as a central
point for a network, providing access to files and
services.

SMF
PianoSoft·Plus™

Abbreviation for Standard MIDI File.

PianoSoft·Plus disks contain Ensemble songs that
can be played on the Disklavier.

SMF Song Format

Polyphony

A song file format supported by MIDI sequencers
and music software.

The maximum number of voices (or sounds) that
can be produced at a time from MIDI instruments.

Song

Provider
A communications business that offers Internet
connection services. In order to connect to the
Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider.

Proxy
A proxy server is a server that all computers on a
local network have to go through before accessing
information on the Internet. It intercepts all or
designated requests to the real server to see if it
can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the
request to the real server. Proxy servers are used
to improve performance and speed, and to filter
requests, usually for security and to prevent
unauthorized access to an internal network.

140

Normally, a short piece of music with lyrics.
However, for clarity in Disklavier manuals, the term
is used to refer to any piece of music of any genre.

Standard MIDI File
A file of MIDI data that can be read and used by a
number of different MIDI devices and computers.

Subnet Mask
A setting used to divide a large-scale network into
several smaller networks.

TG Master Tune
The function that allows you to tune the internal XG
tone generator, and if connected, an external tone
generator simultaneously so that their tunings
match that of the Disklavier.

Chapter

Glossary

Tone Generator
An electronic device that can generate tones or
instrument voices.

Transpose

USB

English

Changing the key of a song. For example, a song in
the key of C is transposed to the key of D when it is
moved up two semitones.

An interface for connecting an external device with
plug and play. The Disklavier supplies with 2 TO
DEVICE terminal with USB 1.1 standard and 1 TO
HOST terminal. You can use as the external
memory media if connected a USB flash memory or
a USB hard disk to TO DEVICE terminal. Also the
Disklavier enables you to enjoy a variety of MIDI
features by connecting a computer to TO HOST
terminal.

Voice
The sounds produced by a tone generator
expressing various instruments.

Web Page
Refers to each individual page that makes up a
website.

Website
This refers to the group of web pages that are
opened together. For example, the collection of
web pages whose addresses begin with “http://
www.yamaha.com/ ” is referred to as the Yamaha
site.

XG
Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM (General
MIDI) format. Its greater polyphony, more voices,
and use of effects enhances the compatibility
between MIDI devices. When a song in the
Yamaha XG format is played on another XGcompatible tone generator or synthesizer, it plays
and sounds as the original composer/creator
intended.

141

Chapter

Internal Tone Generator Voices
The following table lists the basic voices for the internal GM/XG and TG3 tone generator.

Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice List
Voice #

Display Name

01 Piano

142

Voice #

Display Name

Voice #

043

Orgel

086

Display Name
OrgFlute

001

GrandPno

044

Vibes

087

TrmOrgFl

002

GrndPnoK

045

VibesK

088

ReedOrgn

003

MelloGrP

046

HardVibe

089

Puff Org

004

PianoStr

047

Marimba

090

Acordion

005

Dream

048

MarimbaK

091

Accordlt

006

BritePno

049

SineMrmb

092

Harmnica

007

BritPnoK

050

Balafon2

093

Harmo 2

008

E.Grand

051

Log Drum

094

TangoAcd

009

EIGrPnoK

052

Xylophon

095

TngoAcd2

010

Det.CP80

053

TubulBel

04 Guitar

011

ElGrPno1

054

ChrchBel

096

NylonGtr

012

ElGrPno2

055

Carillon

097

NylonGt2

013

HnkyTonk

056

Dulcimer

098

NylonGt3

014

HnkyTnkK

057

Dulcimr2

099

VelGtHrm

015

E.Piano1

058

Cimbalom

100

Ukulele

016

El.Pno1K

059

Santur

101

SteelGtr

017

MelloEP1

03 Organ

102

SteelGt2

018

Chor.EP1

060

DrawOrgn

103

12StrGtr

019

HardEl.P

061

DetDrwOr

104

Nyln&Stl

020

VX El.P1

062

60sDrOr1

105

Stl&Body

021

60sEl.P

063

60sDrOr2

106

Mandolin

022

E.Piano2

064

70sDrOr1

107

Jazz Gtr

023

El.Pno2K

065

DrawOrg2

108

MelloGtr

024

Chor.EP2

066

60sDrOr3

109

JazzAmp

025

DX Hard

067

EvenBar

110

CleanGtr

026

DXLegend

068

16+2”2/3

111

ChorusGt

027

DX Phase

069

Organ Ba

112

Mute.Gtr

028

DX+Analg

070

70sDrOr2

113

FunkGtr1

029

DXKotoEP

071

CheezOrg

114

MuteStlG

030

VX El.P2

072

DrawOrg3

115

FunkGtr2

031

Harpsi.

073

PercOrgn

116

Jazz Man

032

Harpsi.K

074

70sPcOr1

117

Ovrdrive

033

Harpsi.2

075

DetPrcOr

118

Gt.Pinch

034

Harpsi.3

076

LiteOrg

119

Dist.Gtr

035

Clavi.

077

PercOrg2

120

FeedbkGt

036

Clavi.K

078

RockOrgn

121

FeedbGt2

037

ClaviWah

079

RotaryOr

122

GtrHarmo

038

PulseClv

080

SloRotar

123

GtFeedbk

039

PierceCl

081

FstRotar

124

GtrHrmo2

02 ChromaticPerc

082

ChrchOrg

040

Celesta

083

ChurOrg3

05 Bass
125

041

Glocken

084

ChurOrg2

126

JazzRthm

042

MusicBox

085

NotreDam

127

VXUprght

Aco.Bass

Chapter

Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #

Display Name

Voice #

FngrBass

178

129

FingrDrk

130

FlangeBa

179

131

Ba&DstEG

180

132

FngrSlap

181

133

FngBass2

182

134

ModAlem

135

PickBass

136
137

Display Name
Timpani

Voice #

Display Name

227

Tp&TbSec

228

BrssSec2

Strings1

229

HiBrass

S.Strngs

230

MelloBrs

SlowStr

231

SynBras1

ArcoStr

232

QuackBr

183

60sStrng

233

RezSynBr

184

Orchestr

234

PolyBrss

MutePkBa

185

Orchstr2

235

SynBras3

Fretless

186

TremOrch

236

JumpBrss

138

Fretles2

187

VeloStr

237

AnaVelBr

139

Fretles3

188

Strings2

238

AnaBrss1

140

Fretles4

189

S.SlwStr

239

SynBras2

141

SynFretl

190

LegatoSt

240

Soft Brs

142

Smooth

191

Warm Str

241

SynBras4

143

SlapBas1

192

Kingdom

242

ChorBrss

144

ResoSlap

193

70s Str

243

VelBras2

145

PunchThm

194

Str Ens3

244

AnaBrss2

146

SlapBas2

195

Syn.Str1

147

VeloSlap

196

ResoStr

245

SprnoSax

148

SynBass1

197

Syn Str4

246

Alto Sax

149

SynBa1Dk

198

SS Str

247

Sax Sect

150

FastResB

199

Syn.Str2

248

HyprAlto

151

AcidBass

200

ChoirAah

249

TenorSax

152

Clv Bass

201

S.Choir

250

BrthTnSx

153

TeknoBa

202

Ch.Aahs2

251

SoftTenr

154

Oscar

203

MelChoir

252

TnrSax 2

155

SqrBass

204

ChoirStr

253

Bari.Sax

156

RubberBa

205

VoiceOoh

254

Oboe

157

Hammer

206

SynVoice

255

Eng.Horn

158

SynBass2

207

SynVox2

256

Bassoon

159

MelloSB1

208

Choral

257

Clarinet

160

Seq Bass

209

AnaVoice

161

ClkSynBa

210

Orch.Hit

258

162

SynBa2Dk

211

OrchHit2

259

Flute

163

SmthBa 2

212

Impact

260

Recorder

164

ModulrBa

08 Brass

261

PanFlute

165

DX Bass

213

Trumpet

262

Bottle

166

X WireBa

07 Ensemble

English

128

09 Reed

10 Pipe
Piccolo

214

Trumpet2

263

Shakhchi

06 Strings

215

BriteTrp

264

Whistle

167

Violin

216

WarmTrp

265

Ocarina

168

SlowVln

217

Trombone

169

Viola

218

Trmbone2

266

SquareLd

170

Cello

219

Tuba

267

Square 2

171

Contrabs

220

Tuba 2

268

LMSquare

172

Trem.Str

221

Mute.Trp

269

Hollow

173

SlwTrStr

222

Fr.Horn

270

Shmoog

174

Susp Str

223

FrHrSolo

271

Mellow

175

Pizz.Str

224

FrHorn2

272

SoloSine

176

Harp

225

HornOrch

273

SineLead

177

YangChin

226

BrasSect

274

Saw.Lead

11 Synth Lead

143

Chapter

Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #

Display Name

Voice #

Display Name

Saw 2

325

Halo Pad

375

BelChoir

276

ThickSaw

326

SweepPad

376

Echoes

277

DynaSaw

327

Shwimmer

377

EchoPad2

278

DigiSaw

328

Converge

378

Echo Pan

279

Big Lead

329

PolarPad

379

EchoBell

280

HeavySyn

330

Celstial

380

Big Pan

13 Synth Effects

281

WaspySyn

282

PulseSaw

331

381

SynPiano

Rain

382

Creation

283

Dr. Lead

284

VeloLead

332

ClaviPad

383

Stardust

333

HrmoRain

384

Reso Pan

285

Seq Ana

334

AfrcnWnd

385

Sci-Fi

286

CaliopLd

335

Caribean

386

Starz

287

Pure Pad

336

SoundTrk

14 Ethnic

288

Chiff Ld

337

Prologue

387

Sitar

289

Rubby

338

Ancestrl

388

DetSitar

290

CharanLd

339

Crystal

389

Sitar 2

291

DistLead

340

SynDrCmp

390

Tambra

292

WireLead

341

Popcorn

391

Tamboura

293

Voice Ld

342

TinyBell

392

Banjo

294

SynthAah

343

RndGlock

393

MuteBnjo

295

VoxLead

344

GlockChi

394

Rabab

296

Fifth Ld

345

ClearBel

395

Gopichnt

297

Big Five

346

ChorBell

396

Oud

298

Bass &Ld

347

SynMalet

397

Shamisen

299

Big&Low

348

SftCryst

398

Koto

300

Fat&Prky

349

LoudGlok

399

T.Koto

301

SoftWurl

350

XmasBell

400

Kanoon

12 Synth Pad

144

Voice #

275

351

VibeBell

401

Kalimba

302

NewAgePd

352

DigiBell

402

Bagpipe

303

Fantasy2

353

AirBells

403

Fiddle

304

Warm Pad

354

BellHarp

404

Shanai

305

ThickPad

355

Gamelmba

405

Shanai2

306

Soft Pad

356

Atmosphr

406

Pungi

307

SinePad

357

WarmAtms

407

Hichriki

308

Horn Pad

358

HollwRls

309

RotarStr

359

NylonEP

408

TnklBell

310

PolySyPd

360

NylnHarp

409

Bonang

311

PolyPd80

361

Harp Vox

410

Gender

312

ClickPad

362

AtmosPad

411

Gamelan

313

Ana Pad

363

Planet

412

S.Gamlan

314

SquarPad

364

Bright

413

Rama Cym

315

ChoirPad

365

FantaBel

414

AsianBel

316

Heaven2

366

Smokey

415

Agogo

317

ltopia

367

Goblins

416

SteelDrm

318

CC Pad

368

GobSyn

417

GlasPerc

319

BowedPad

369

50sSciFi

418

ThaiBell

320

Glacier

370

Ring Pad

419

WoodBlok

321

GlassPad

371

Ritual

420

Castanet

322

MetalPad

372

ToHeaven

421

TaikoDrm

323

Tine Pad

373

Night

422

Gr.Cassa

324

Pan Pad

374

Glisten

423

MelodTom

15 Percussive

Chapter

Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #

Display Name

Voice #

Display Name

Voice #

Display Name

Mel Tom2

459

Feed

485

Punch

425

Real Tom

460

Dog

486

Heart

426

Rock Tom

461

Horse

487

FootStep

427

Syn.Drum

462

Bird 2

488

MchinGun

428

Ana Tom

463

Ghost

489

LaserGun

429

ElecPerc

464

Maou

490

Xplosion

430

RevCymbl

465

Tel.Dial

491

FireWork

466

DoorSqek

FretNoiz

467

DoorSlam

432

BrthNoiz

468

Scratch

433

Seashore

469

Scratch2

434

470

WindChm

435

Telphone

471

Telphon2

436

Helicptr

472

CarEngin

437

Applause

473

Car Stop

438

Gunshot

474

Car Pass

475

CarCrash

431

18 SFX Voice
450

CuttngNz

476

Siren

451

CttngNz2

477

Train

452

Str Slap

478

Jetplane

453

Fl.KClik

479

Starship

454

Rain

480

Burst

455

Thunder

481

Coaster

456

Wind

482

SbMarine

457

Stream

483

Laughing

458

Bubble

484

Scream

Internal GM/XG Tone
Generator Drum Voice
List
Voice #

English

424

16 Sound Effects

Display Name

17 Drum Kit
439

StandKit

440

Stnd2Kit

441

Room Kit

442

Rock Kit

443

ElectKit

444

AnalgKit

445

Jazz Kit

446

BrushKit

447

ClascKit

448

SFX Kit1

449

SFX Kit2

Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice List
Voice #

Display Name

Voice #
016

01 Piano

Display Name
Dulcimer

03 Organ

Voice #

Display Name

031

Dist.Gtr

032

GtrHarmo

001

GrandPno

002

BritePno

017

003

E.Grand

018

PercOrgn

033

Aco.Bass

004

HnkyTonk

019

RockOrgn

034

FngrBass

005

E.Piano1

020

ChrchOrg

035

PickBass

006

E.Piano2

021

ReedOrgn

036

Fretless

007

Harpsi.

022

Acordion

037

SlapBas1

008

Clavi.

023

Harmnica

038

SlapBas2

024

TangoAcd

039

SynBass1

040

SynBass2

02 ChromaticPerc

DrawOrgn

05 Bass

009

Celesta

04 Guitar

010

Glocken

025

NylonGtr

06 Strings

011

MusicBox

026

SteelGtr

041

Violin

012

Vibes

027

Jazz Gtr

042

Viola

013

Marimba

028

CleanGtr

043

Cello

014

Xylophon

029

Mute.Gtr

044

Contrabs

015

TubulBel

030

Ovrdrive

045

Trem.Str

145

Chapter

Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #

Display Name

Pizz.Str

091

PolySyPd

047

Harp

092

ChoirPad

048

Timpani

093

BowedPad

094

MetalPad

07 Ensemble
049

Strings1

095

Halo Pad

050

Strings2

096

SweepPad

051

Syn.Str1

052

Syn.Str2

097

Rain

053

ChoirAah

098

SoundTrk

054

VoiceOoh

099

Crystal

055

SynVoice

100

Atmosphr

056

Orch.Hit

101

Bright

102

Goblins

08 Brass

13 Synth Effects

057

Trumpet

103

Echoes

058

Trombone

104

Sci-Fi

059

Tuba

060

Mute.Trp

105

Sitar

061

Fr.Horn

106

Banjo

062

BrasSect

107

Shamisen

063

SynBras1

108

Koto

064

SynBras2

109

Kalimba

110

Bagpipe

09 Reed

14 Ethnic

065

SprnoSax

111

Fiddle

066

Alto Sax

112

Shanai

067

TenorSax

068

Bari.Sax

113

TnklBell

069

Oboe

114

Agogo

070

Eng.Horn

115

SteelDrm

071

Bassoon

116

WoodBlok

072

Clarinet

117

TaikoDrm

118

MelodTom

10 Pipe

15 Percussive

073

Piccolo

119

Syn.Drum

074

Flute

120

RevCymbl

075

Recorder

16 Sound Effects

076

PanFlute

121

FretNoiz

077

Bottle

122

BrthNoiz

078

Shakhchi

123

Seashore

079

Whistle

124

080

Ocarina

125

Telphone

126

Helicptr

11 Synth Lead
081

SquareLd

127

Applause

082

Saw.Lead

128

Gunshot

083

CaliopLd

084

Chiff Ld

085

CharanLd

086

Voice Ld

087

Fifth Ld

088

Bass &Ld

12 Synth Pad

146

Voice #

046

089

NewAgePd

090

Warm Pad

Internal TG3 Tone
Generator Drum Voice
List
Voice #

Display Name

17 Drum Kit
129

StandKit

Chapter

Specifications

General Specifications

Removable Media

Internal Memory

128 MB

CD-ROM

Audio CD (CD-DA), Data CD (ISO9660 Level1-compliant)

USB Flash Memory

FAT16 or FAT32 format
Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available
USB flash memories.

Floppy Disk*1

3.5” 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1.44 MB)

File Format

Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 0, Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 1,
E-SEQ format

Song Format

PianoSoft (Solo), PianoSoft·Plus, PianoSoft·PlusAudio,
SmartPianoSoft, SmartKey (CueTIME)*2 *3

Pitch Control

Set at A=440Hz, tunable –50 to +50 cents in 1 cent increment

Ensemble Tone

Connectors

Type

Advanced Wave Memory 2 (AWM2)

Polyphony

32 notes (max.)

Ensemble Parts

16 parts

Voice Module Modes

XG, GM

Normal Voices

676 voices (480 voices can be used for playing)

Drum Voices

21 kits (11 kits can be used for playing)

MIDI

MIDI IN, MIDI OUT

Audio

OUTPUT, ANALOG MIDI IN, OMNI IN, OMNI OUT

Others

LAN, USB (1  TO HOST, 2  TO DEVICE)

Dimensions (W  H  D)

292  49  216 mm (11-1/2”  1-15/16”  8-1/2”)

Weight

2.7 kg (5.95 lb)

Rated Power

DC12 V 3A, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

14 W

Supplied Accessories

Remote control (1), battery for remote control (2), remote control sensor
shielding sticker (1), sample PianoSoft CD software (1), MIDI cable (2),
audio cable (3), conversion cable for control (1), AC adaptor (PJP-PS02/
PJP-PS04 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) (1), power cable
(1), operation manual (1), PianoSoft CD song list (1)

Optional Accessories

Control unit suspension kit*4, USB floppy disk drive (UD-FD01)

English

Data Storage

147

Chapter

Specifications

Functions & Controls

Playback Functions

Recording
Functions

Metronome

Utility Functions

Media Select

Internal memory, CD, USB media (including floppy disk)

Song Select

Cursor buttons (control unit), cursor buttons/numeric section (remote
control)

Basic Functions

Play, stop, pause

Song Search

Reverse/forward w/ sound (MIDI songs), reverse/forward w/o sound
(audio songs), directly by time or measure

Repeat

ALL (all songs in current album), RPT (current song), RND (all songs in
current album in random order), A-B

Part Cancel

L (left), R (right), pedal

Timer Playback

See page 51.

SmartKey™ Playback*2 *3

See page 56.

Video Synchronization

See page 75.

PianoSmart™ Playback

See page 77.

Volume

11 levels (–10 to 0)

Tempo

–50 to 50% in 1% increment

Transposition

–24 to +24 semitones (2 octaves) in 1 semitone increment

Balance (TG, Audio)

10 to 127

Piano Part Recording

L/R overwrite, split

Metronome Mode
Recording

See page 58.

Tempo Change

See page 65.

Video Synchronization

See page 71.

Audio CD Synchronization

See page 76.

Tempo

30 to 400 beats per minutes

Time Signatures

1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 9/4

Volume

Controllable

Song

Copy, delete, rename, sort, add to playlist, type convert, time format
convert, strip XP

Album

Copy, delete, create, rename, sort, add to playlist

Playlist

Create, delete, rename

Backup/Restore

See pages 107 and 108.

Floppy Disk*1

Format
*3

DisklavierRadio
Network Functions

FromToPC Folder
*3

Network Update
Update

See pages 30 and 37.
See pages 101 to 105.
See page 39.
Firmware update with media (CD-ROM or USB flash memory) or via the
Internet*3

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Note:

*1
*2
*3
*4

148

Possible with optional USB floppy disk drive (UD-FD01).
Available only on models capable of SmartKey™ playback.
Available only on models of which the control unit is replaced with the Disklavier control unit.
Available only on grand pianos.

Appendix

Disklavier Control Unit DKC-850

Software License Notice
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.

■ Preamble

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

Software License Notice

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
know you can do these things.

Appendix

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making
the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or
not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

A-1

Software License Notice

■ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0

This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the
Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say,
a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term modification.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on
what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program
a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or
is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with
a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.

A-2

Software License Notice
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do
one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

Software License Notice

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.

Appendix

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the executable.
However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.

A-3

Software License Notice
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number
of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose
any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of
our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

A-4

Software License Notice

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

■ Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

Software License Notice

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
are informed that you can do these things.

Appendix

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages — typically libraries — of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or
the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on
the explanations below.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to
make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a
version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for
certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

A-5

Software License Notice
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason
we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license
provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible
use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs
must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C
Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system,
as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does
ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the
wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”.
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.

■ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each
licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form
executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library
(independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what
the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

A-6

Software License Notice
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each
copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License
along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.

Software License Notice

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

Appendix

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an
application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a
work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make
any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that
copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is
not a library.

A-7

Software License Notice
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope
of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses
the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for
distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if
the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and
small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file
is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this
object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the
Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute
that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work
for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that
the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the
work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the
Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the
contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer
system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

A-8

Software License Notice
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user
the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already
sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and
utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you
cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same
work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

Software License Notice

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.

Appendix

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and
of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or
modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.

A-9

Software License Notice
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

A-10

Software License Notice

expat
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

All code incorporated from 4.4 BSD is distributed under the following license:

Software License Notice

This file contains the copying permission notices for various files in the GNU C Library distribution
that have copyright owners other than the Free Software Foundation. These notices all require
that a copy of the notice be included in the accompanying documentation and be distributed with
binary distributions of the code, so be sure to include this file along with any binary distributions
derived from the GNU C Library.

Appendix

glibc

Copyright © 1991 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. [This condition was removed.]
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

A-11

Software License Notice
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
The DNS resolver code, taken from BIND 4.9.5, is copyrighted both by UC Berkeley and by Digital
Equipment Corporation. The DEC portions are under the following license:
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all
copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL
EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
The Sun RPC support (from rpcsrc-4.0) is covered by the following license:
Copyright © 1984, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that
this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part.
Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute
it to anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE
WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. to assist in its use, correction, modification or enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR
ANY PART THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special,
indirect and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
The following CMU license covers some of the support code for Mach, derived from Mach 3.0:
Mach Operating System
Copyright © 1991, 1990, 1989 Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby
granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of
the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both
notices appear in supporting documentation.

A-12

Software License Notice
CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS “AS IS” CONDITION.
CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to
Software Distribution Coordinator
School of Computer Science
Carnegie Mellon University
Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890
or Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU any improvements or extensions that they make and
grant Carnegie Mellon the rights to redistribute these changes.
The file if_ppp.h is under the following CMU license:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.

Software License Notice

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Appendix

3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

The following license covers the files from Intel’s “Highly Optimized Mathematical Functions for
Itanium” collection:
Intel License Agreement
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

A-13

Software License Notice
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
The files inet/getnameinfo.c and sysdeps/posix/getaddrinfo.c are copyright © by Craig Metz and
are distributed under the following license:
The Inner Net License, Version 2.00
The author(s) grant permission for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are
met:
0. If you receive a version of the software that is specifically labelled as not being for
redistribution (check the version message and/or README), you are not permitted to
redistribute that version of the software in any way or form.
1. All terms of the all other applicable copyrights and licenses must be followed.
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer.
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
4. [The copyright holder has authorized the removal of this clause.]
5. Neither the name(s) of the author(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
If these license terms cause you a real problem, contact the author.

libcap
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text describes the licensed conditions under
which the contents of this libcap release may be used and distributed:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

A-14

Software License Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above
restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)

Copyright © 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:

Software License Notice

libupnp

Appendix

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ìAS
ISî AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

A-15

Software License Notice

ntp
Copyright Notice
jpg “Clone me,” says Dolly sheepishly
Last update: 02:45 UTC Tuesday, June 27, 2006
The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol
Version 4 Distribution. Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file, this notice
applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file.
Copyright © David L. Mills 1992-2006
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in
all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. The University of
Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose. It is
provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.

openldap
The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation (“Software”), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices,
this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is
distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision
or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE
SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission.
Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.

A-16

Software License Notice
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights
Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.

openssl
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses.
In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

Software License Notice

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”

Appendix

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear
in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.

A-17

Software License Notice
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the
parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or
textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
7. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
8. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
9. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related :-).
10. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code
cannot be changed.
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license
[including the GNU Public License.]

A-18

Software License Notice

pam
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated the following text describes the licensed conditions under
which the contents of this Linux-PAM release may be distributed:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above
restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)
Appendix
Software License Notice

unzip
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
The definitive version of this document should be available at
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.
Copyright © 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the following set of
individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly,
Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van
der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George
Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M.
Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich
Wales, Mike White
This software is provided “as is,” without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or
consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
A-19

Software License Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer,
and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a
standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been
removed from the binary or disabled.
3. Altered versions — including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports
with new graphical interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versions — must be
plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. Such
altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases — including, but
not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further
prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,” “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and “MacZip” for its own source and binary releases.

zlib
© 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
jloup@gzip.org

Mark Adler
madler@alumni.caltech.edu

If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal
documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library
has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code.
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog
history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the
distribution of modified source versions.

A-20

MIDI Data Format
If you are familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music software with computergenerated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control your Disklavier.
Messages include those that can be received by the piano part and/or those that can be received by an
ESBL part. Messages that can be transmitted as well as received are shown as “transmitted.”
1.

CHANNEL MESSAGES

1.1

Key On / Key Off

Cntrl#
64

(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Piano Part reception note range = A-1~C7 : C3=60
ESBL part reception note range = C-2~G8
Velocity range = 1~127 (Only the Key On velocity is received)

1.2
1.2.1

Bank Select
Cntrl#
0

Parameter
Bank Select MSB

Bank Select LSB

Parameter
Portamento Time

Data Range
0...127

1.2.11 Soft Pedal
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl#
Parameter
Data Range
67
Soft Pedal
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)

1.2.12 Harmonic Content
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the resonance set for each Voice.
Cntrl#
71

Parameter
Harmonic Content

Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

Depending on the Voice, the effective range may be narrower
than the range available for adjustment.

1.2.13 Release Time
Messages which adjust the envelope release time set for each
Voice.
Cntrl#
72

Parameter
Release Time

Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

1.2.14 Attack Time
(ESBL Part)

(ESBL Part)

Messages which adjust the envelope attack time set for each
Voice.

Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by
RPN/NRPN.

Cntrl#
73

Data Entry

Cntrl#
6
38

Parameter
Data Entry MSB
Data Entry LSB

Data Range
0...127
0...127

Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB.

Main Volume
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl#
7

Parameter
Main Volume

Data Range
0...127

Cntrl#
10

Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

1.2.15 Brightness
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each
Voice.
Cntrl#
74

Parameter
Brightness

Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

(ESBL Part)
Parameter
Pan

Data Range
0...127

(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Parameter
Expression

Messages which apply a portamento between the currentlysounding note and the subsequent note.
Cntrl#
84

Expression
Cntrl#
11

Parameter
Attack Time

1.2.16 Portamento Control

Pan
(ESBL Part)

1.2.8

Data Range
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)

(ESBL Part)

When the parameter 1.2.9 Portamento = ON, values will adjust
the speed of pitch change.
A setting of 0 - minimum portamento time, and 127 - maximum
portamento time.

1.2.7

Parameter
Sostenuto

MIDI Data Format

Data Range
0...127

Portamento Time
Cntrl#
5

Cntrl#
66

Appendix

Parameter
Modulation

(ESBL Part)

1.2.6

Data Range
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)

Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound.

Modulation
Cntrl#
1

1.2.5

Cntrl#
65

(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Data Range
0: Normal,
63: User voice,
64: SFX,
126: SFX kit,
127: Drum
0...127

(ESBL Part)

1.2.4

Parameter
Portamento

Portamento
(ESBL Part)

1.2.10 Sostenuto

You can select the Voice banks with MSB and LSB numbers.
MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the play mode.
In XG mode, MSB numbers select Voice type (Normal Voice or
Drum Voice), and LSB number select Voice banks.
In TG300B mode, LSB is fixed, and MSB numbers select Voice
banks.
(See Normal Voice List Drum Voice List.)
A new bank selection will not become effective until the next
Program Change message is received.

1.2.3

Data Range
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)

Control Change
(ESBL Part) (transmitted)

1.2.2

1.2.9

Parameter
Hold1

Data Range
0...127

Hold1
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)

Parameter
Portamento Control

Data Range
0...127

1.2.17 Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
91

Parameter
Effect1 Depth

Data Range
0...127

A-21

MIDI Data Format
1.2.18 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level)

$1D

$rr

$mm

$1E

$rr

$mm

$1F

$rr

$mm

(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
93

Parameter
Effect3 Depth

Data Range
0...127

1.2.19 Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
94

Parameter
Effect4 Depth

Data Range
0...127

1.2.20 Data Increment / Decrement (for RPN)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
96
97

Parameter
RPN Increment
RPN Decrement

Data Range
0...127
0...127

1.2.21 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
98
99

Parameter
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB

Data Range
0...127
0...127

First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the
parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry to set
the value of the specified parameter.
* Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel subsequent
data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change.
Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH,
7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result.
The following NRPN number can be received.
NRPN
MSB LSB
$01

$08

$01

$09

$01

$0A

$01

$20

$01

$21

$01

$63

$01

$64

$01

$66

$14

$rr

$15

$rr

$16

$rr

$17

A-22

$rr

$18

$rr

$19

$rr

$1A

$rr

$1C

$rr

Data entry
MSB
PARAMETER NAME and VALUE
RANGE
$mm
Vibrato Rate
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Vibrato Depth
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Vibrato Delay
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Filter Cutoff Frequency
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Filter Resonance
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
EG Attack Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
EG Decay Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
EG Release Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Filter Resonance
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum EG Attack
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum EG Decay Rate
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
Applies to both Decay1 and 2.
$mm
Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Instrument Pitch Fine
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Instrument Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Instrument Pan
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (random, left center - right)
rr : drum instrument note number

Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 -max)
rr : drum instrument note number
Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
Drum Instrument Variation Send
Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number

MSB 14H- 1FH (for Drum) is valid only if the Multi Part
parameter PART MODE = DRUMS 1 or DRUMS2 for that
channel. (If PART MODE = DRUM, no values will be changed.)

1.2.22 RPN (Registered Parameter Number)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
100
101

Parameter
RPN LSB
RPN MSB

Data Range
0...127
0...127

The following RPN numbers can be received.
RPN Data entry
MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME and VALUE
RANGE
00H 00H mmH — Pitch Bend Sensitivity
mm:00-18H (0-24 chromatic steps)
Assignable in chromatic steps up to 2
octaves
Default : 02H
LSB value is ignored.
00H 01H mmH 11H Fine Tuning
mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64-0-+63)
00H 02H mmH — Coarse Tuning
mm: 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - +24
chromatic steps)
LSB value is ignored.
7FH 7FH —
— RPN null
Cancels RPN and NRPN numbers

1.2.23 Channel Mode Messages
The following Channel Mode Messages can be received.
2nd byte
120
121
123
124
125
126
127

1.2.23.1

3rd byte
0
0
0
0
0
0 ~ 16
0

All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly

All Sound Off

(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
ESBL part;
Terminates all sounds currently sounding on the specified
channel. However, the status of channel messages such as
Note On and Hold On is maintained.
Piano Part;
The status of channel messages is not maintained.

1.2.23.2

Reset All Controllers

(ESBL Part)
The values of the following controllers will be reset to the
defaults.
CONTROLLER
Pitch Bend Change
Channel Aftertouch
Polyphonic Aftertouch
Modulation
Expression
Hold l
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft Pedal

VALUE
±O (center)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
127 (max)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)

MIDI Data Format
Portamento Control
RPN
NRPN

cancels the Portamento Source Key
Number that was received
number not specified; internal data
will not change
number not specified; internal data
will not change

1.2.23.3 All Note Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)

[OTHER]
1) Master tuning
2) TG300 System Data Parameter change
3) TG300 Multi Effect Data parameter change
4) TG300 Multi Part Data parameter change

2.1.2
2.1.2.1

11110000
01111111
01111111
00000100
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111
or
11110000
01111111
0xxxnnnn
00000100
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111

1.2.23.4 Omni Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is
received.

1.2.23.5 Omni On
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is
received.

1.2.23.6 Mono
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds off message
is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0
- 16, sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m
= 1).

2.1.3
2.1.3.1

Program Change
(ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Messages for Voice selection.
With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic
Voice numbers, but also variation Voice bank numbers.

Pitch Bend
(ESBL Part)
When Multi Part Parameter Rcv PITCH BEND CHANGE=OFF,
pitch bend for that part is not received.

Polyphonic Aftertouch

F0
7E
7F
09
01
F7

= Exclusive status
= Universal Non-Real Time
= ID of target device
= Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
= Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
= End of Exclusive

F0
7E
XN
09
01
F7

= Exclusive status
= Universal Non-Real Time
= Device Number, xxx = don’t care
= Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
= Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
= End of Exclusive

When General MIDI Mode On is received. the play mode will be
changed to XG mode.
When this happens, the ESBL part will receive the MIDI
messages which compatible with GM System Level 1, and
consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this messag, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message.

(ESBL Part)
(ESBL Part) (PianoPart) (transmitted)
Applying further pressure on the key does not output “key
aftertouch” information. Instead, key position is transmitted as
additional information.

General MIDI Mode On

MIDI Data Format

0;Off Disklavier keyboard does not play the internal voices.
127;On

1.6

= Exclusive status
= Universal Real Time
= Device Number, xxx = don’t care
= Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
= Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
= Volume LSB
= Volume MSB
= End of Exclusive

Universal Non-Realtime Messages

11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
11110111
or
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn
00001001
00000001
11110111

(Piano Part, ESBL Part)

Channel Aftertouch

F0
7F
XN
04
01
SS
TT
F7

(ESBL Part)

1.2.24 Local Control

1.5

= Exclusive status
= Universal Real Time
= ID of target device
= Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
= Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
= Volume LSB
= Volume MSB
= End of Exclusive

Appendix

(Piano Part, ESBL Part)

1.4

F0
7F
7F
04
01
*SS
TT
F7

When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the
System Parameter MASTER VOLUME.
* “SS” is the hexadecimal expression of Osssssss; same as for
“tt”, “aa”, etc.

1.2.23.7 Poly

1.3

Master Volume
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)

Terminates all notes currently on for the specified channel.
However, if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue
sounding until these are turned off.

Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message
is received. and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode
(Mode 3).

Universal Realtime Messages

2.1.4

XG Native Parameter Change
(ESBL Part)

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES

2.1

Parameter Change
The Disklavier receives the following parameter change
messages.
[UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE]
1) Master Volume
[UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE]
1) General MIDI Mode On
[XG NATIVE]
1) XG System on
2) XG System Data parameter change
3) Multi Effect1 Data parameter change
4) Multi Part Data parameter change
5) Drums Setup Data parameter change

With the Parameter Change messages as listed below, you can
change the characteristic of a Voice, such as by Effect Type or
effect parameter, transpose, tuning, and others.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
11110111

F0
43
1n
4C
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
ddddddd
|
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
XG Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive

* Any number is OK since the device number for the Disklavier
is fixed to “All.”

A-23

MIDI Data Format
For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate
number of data bytes.
When sending the parameter change messages consecutively, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval (if the time base is 480. ca 5
unit) between the messages.

2.1.4.1

2.2.1

XG System On
(ESBL Part)
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
00000000
11110111

F0
43
1N
4C
00
00
7E
00
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
XG Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive

When this data is received. the Disklavier will switch to XG
mode and all the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and
XG-compatible messages such as NRPN and Bank Select
messages can be received.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message

2.1.4.2

XG System Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)

2.2.1.1

Multi Effect1 Data parameter change

See tables <1-1> and <1-2>.

2.2.1.2

Multi Part Data parameter change

(ESBL Part)

See tables <1-1> and <1-4>.

2.2.1.4

2.2.2

Other parameter changes
Master Tuning
(ESBL Part)
F0
43
1n
27
30
00
00
mm
ll
cc
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Sub ID2

QS300 Native Bulk Dump
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001101
0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
|
0ccccccc
11110111

If a Drum Setup Reset parameter change message is received, the
Drum Setup parameter values will be initialized.
Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter
values to be initialized.

2.2.2.1

F0
43
0n
4B
bbbbbbb
bbbbbbb
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
dd
|
|
ccccccc
F7

Master Tune MSB
Master Tune LSB
End of Exclusive

Bulk Dump
(ESBL Part)
The Disklavier receives the following bulk dump data.
[XG NATIVE]
1) XG System Data
2) Multi Effect1 Data
3) Multi Part Data
4) Drums Setup Data
[QS300 NATIVE]
1) QS300 User Normal Voice Data

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
QS300 Model ID
ByteCount
ByteCount
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data

Checksum
End of Exclusive

QS300 User Normal Voice Data bulk damp
(ESBL Part)

This message simultaneously changes the pitch of all channels.

A-24

Drums Setup Data bulk dump
See tables <1-1> and <1-5>.

See tables <1-1> and <1-5>.

2.2

Multi Part Data bulk dump

(ESBL Part)

Drums Setup Data parameter change

11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00100111
00110000
00000000
00000000
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ccccccc
11110111

Multi Effect1 Data bulk dump
See tables <1-1> and <1-3>.

2.2.1.3

See tables <1-1> and <1-4>.

2.1.5.1

XG System Data bulk dump

(ESBL Part)

2.1.5

Checksum
End of Exclusive

(ESBL Part)

See tables <1-1> and <1-3>.

2.1.4.5

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
XG Model ID
ByteCount
ByteCount
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data

(ESBL Part)

2.1.4.4

F0
43
0n
4C
bbbbbbb
bbbbbbb
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
dd
|
|
ccccccc
F7

For the Address and Byte Count, refer to the supplementary
tables.
The Checksum is the value that results in a value of 0 for the
lower 7 bits when the Start Address, Byte Count, plus the
Checksum itself are added.

See tables <1-1> and <1-2>.

2.1.4.3

XG Native Bulk Dump
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001100
0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
|
0ccccccc
11110111

See tables <2-1> and <2-2>.

MIDI Data Format
3.

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

3.1

Active Sensing
a)

Transmission
Transmitted.

Reception
Once FE has been received. if no MIDI data is subsequently
received for longer than an interval of approximately
300msec. the Disklavier will perform the same function as
when ALL SOUNDS OFF. ALL NOTES OFF, and RESET
ALL CONTROLLERS messages are received, and will then
return to a status in which FE is not monitored.

Parameter Bass Address
Model ID = 4C [XG]

------->

Address
0B
00
0C
00
:
3n
5B
00
3n
3n

Parameter
note number 13
note number 14
:
note number 91

MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) [XG]
Address
(H)
00
00

04
05
06
7D
7E
7F
TOTAL SIZE

Size Data
(H) (H)
4
0000-07FF

Parameter

1
1
1

MASTER VOLUME
not used
TRANSPOSE
DRUM SETUP RESET
XG SYSTEM ON
ALL PARAMETER RESET

00 - 7F
00 - 7F
28 - 58
n
00
00
07

MASTER TUNE

Description
(H)
-102.4 - +102.3 [cent]
1st bit3-0bit15-12
2nd bit3-0bit11-8
3rd bit3-0bit7-4
4th bit3-0bit3-0
0 - 127

Default value

MIDI Data Format

n: Drum setup number (0, 1)

Appendix

Parameter Change
Address
(H) (M) (L)
Description
XG SYSTEM 00
00
00
System
00
00
7D
Drum setup Reset
00
00
7E
XG System On
All Parameter Reset
00
00
7F
EFFECT1
02
01
00 Effect1 (Reverb, Chorus, Variation)
MULTI PART 08
00
00
Multi Part 1
:
08
0F
00
Multi Part 16
DRUM
30
18
00
Drum Setup 1
30
18
00
Drum Setup 2

00 04 00 00
-400

-24 - +24 [semitones]
n=Drum setup number
00=XG system ON (receive only)
00=ON (receive only)

Parameter

Description

REVERB TYPE MSB
REVERB TYPE LSB
REVERB PARAMETER 1
REVERB PARAMETER 2
REVERB PARAMETER 3
REVERB PARAMETER 4
REVERB PARAMETER 5
REVERB PARAMETER 6
REVERB PARAMETER 7
REVERB PARAMETER 8
REVERB PARAMETER 9
REVERB PARAMETER 10
REVERB RETURN
REVERB PAN

see Effect Type List
00 : basic type
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
-dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)

Default value
(H)
01(=HALL1)
00
Depends on reverb type
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
40
40

MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1) [XG]
Address
(H)
02
01

00
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D

Size Data
(H) (H)
2
00-7F
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
01-7F

A-25

MIDI Data Format
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
10
11
12
13
14
15
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
20

0E
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
2

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
30
31
32
33
34
35
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
40

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0F
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
2

56
57
58
59
5A
5B

1
1
1
1
1
1

5C
5D
5E
5F
60
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
70
71
72
73
74
75
TOTAL SIZE

A-26

1
1
1
1
1
21
1
1
1
1
1
1
6

00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F

REVERB PARAMETER 11
REVERB PARAMETER 12
REVERB PARAMETER 13
REVERB PARAMETER 14
REVERB PARAMETER 15
REVERB PARAMETER 16

see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”

Depends on reverb type
”
”
”
”
”

00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
00-7F

CHORUS TYPE MSB
CHORUS TYPE LSB
CHORUS PARAMETER 1
CHORUS PARAMETER 2
CHORUS PARAMETER 3
CHORUS PARAMETER 4
CHORUS PARAMETER 5
CHORUS PARAMETER 6
CHORUS PARAMETER 7
CHORUS PARAMETER 8
CHORUS PARAMETER 9
CHORUS PARAMETER 10
CHORUS RETURN
CHORUS PAN
SEND CHORUS TO REVERB

see Effect Type List
00 : basic type
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
-dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
-dB...0dB... +6dB(0...64...127)

41 (=CHORUS1)
00
Depends on chorus Type
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
40
40
00

00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F

CHORUS PARAMETER 11
CHORUS PARAMETER 12
CHORUS PARAMETER 13
CHORUS PARAMETER 14
CHORUS PARAMETER 15
CHORUS PARAMETER 16

see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”

Depends on chorus Type
”
”
”
”
”

00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-01
00-0F,7F

VARIATION TYPE MSB
VARIATION TYPE LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB
VARIATION RETURN
VARIATION PAN
SEND VARIATION TO REVERB
SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS
VARIATION CONNECTION
VARIATION PART

05 (=DELAY L, C, R)
00
Depends on variation type
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
40
40
00
00
00
7F

00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F

MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH

see Effect Type List
00 : basic type
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
- dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
- dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
- dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
0:INSERTION, 1:SYSTEM
Part1...16(0...15)
0FF (127)
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63

40
40
40
40
40

00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 11
VARIATION PARAMETER 12
VARIATION PARAMETER 13
VARIATION PARAMETER 14
VARIATION PARAMETER 15
VARIATION PARAMETER 16

see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”

Depends on variation type
”
”
”
”
”

MIDI Data Format

MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART) [XG]
Address
(H)
08
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

00
01
02
03
04
05

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00 - 20
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 0F, 7F
00 - 01

00 - 02

00 - 03

nn
nn
nn

08
09
0A

1
2

28 - 58
00 - FF

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

0 - 32
0 - 127
0 - 127
1 - 128
1 - 16,OFF
0:MONO
1:POLY
SAME NOTE NUMBER KEY ON ASSIGN 0:SINGLE
1:MULTI
2:INST (for DRUM)
PART MODE
0:NORMAL
1:DRUM
2-3:DRUMS1 - 2
NOTE SHIFT
-24 - +24 [semitones]
DETUNE
-12.8 - +12.7 [Hz]
1st bit3-0bit7-4
2nd bit3-0bit3-0
VOLUME
0 - 127
VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH
0 - 127
VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET
0 - 127
PAN
0/random, 1/L63-64/C-127/R63
NOTE LIMIT LOW
C-2 - G8
NOTE LIMIT HIGH
C-2 - G8
DRY LEVEL
0 - 127
CHORUS SEND
0 - 127
REVERB SEND
0 - 127
VARIATION SEND
0 - 127

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK TIME
EG DECAY TIME
EG RELEASE TIME

-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-61 - +63

40
40 (drum part ignores)
40 (drum part ignores)
40
40
40
40
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

1D
1E
1F
20
21
22

1
1
1
1
1
1

28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

MW PITCH CONTROL
MW FILTER CONTROL
MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL
MW LFO PMOD DEPTH
MW LFO FMOD DEPTH
MW LFO AMOD DEPTH

-24 -+24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127

40
40
40
0A
00
00

nn
23
nn
24
nn
25
nn
26
nn
27
nn
28
TOTAL SIZE
nn
30
nn
31
nn
32
nn
33
nn
34
nn
35
nn
36
nn
37
nn
38
nn
39
nn
3A
nn
3B
nn
3C
nn
3D
nn
3E
nn
3F

1
1
1
1
1
1
29
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

BEND PITCH CONTROL
BEND FILTER CONTROL
BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL
BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH
BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH
BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH

-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
+100 - +100 [%]
+100 - +100 [%]
+100 - +100 [%]

42
40
40
40
40
40

00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01

Rcv PITCH BEND
Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH (CAT)
Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE
Rcv CONTROL CHANGE
Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH (PAT)
Rcv NOTE MESSAGE
Rcv RPN
Rcv NRPN
Rcv MODULATION
Rcv VOLUME
Rcv PAN
Rcv EXPRESSION
Rcv HOLD1
Rcv PORTAMENTO
Rcv SOSTENUTO
Rcv SOFT PEDAL

0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON

01
01
01
01
01
01
01
XG=01, GM=00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01

nn
nn

1
1

00 - 01
00 - 7F

Rcv BANK SELECT
SCALE TUNING C

0/OFF,1/ON
-64 - +63 [cent]

XG=01, GM=00
40

Description

ELEMENT RESERVE
BANK SELECT MSB
BANK SELECT LSB
PROGRAM NUMBER
Rcv CHANNEL
MONO/POLY MODE

Default value
(H)
part10=0, other =2
part10=7F, other=0
00
00
part no.
01
1 (all part)
part10=2, other=0
00 (other than Part10)
02 (Part10)
40
08 00
(80)
64
40
40
40
00
7F
7F
00
40
00

Appendix
MIDI Data Format

40
41

Parameter

A-27

MIDI Data Format
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

SCALE TUNING C#
SCALE TUNING D
SCALE TUNING D#
SCALE TUNING E
SCALE TUNING F
SCALE TUNING F#
SCALE TUNING G
SCALE TUNING G#
SCALE TUNING A
SCALE TUNING A#
SCALE TUNING B

-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

4D
4E
4F
50
51
52

1
1
1
1
1
1

28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

CAT PITCH CONTROL
CAT FILTER CONTROL
CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH

-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127

40
40
40
00
00
00

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

53
54
55
56
57
58

1
1
1
1
1
1

28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

PAT PITCH CONTROL
PAT FILTER CONTROL
PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH

-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127

40
40
40
00
00
00

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00 - 5F
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER
AC1 PITCH CONTROL
AC1 FILTER CONTROL
AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH
AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH
AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH

0 - 95
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127

10
40
40
40
00
00
00

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

60
61
62
63
64
65
66

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00 - 5F
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER
AC2 PITCH CONTROL
AC2 FILTER CONTROL
AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH
AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH
AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH

0 - 95
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127

11
40
40
40
00
00
00

nn
nn

67
68

1
1

00 - 01
00 - 7F

PORTAMENTO SWITCH
PORTAMENTO TIME

0/OFF, 1/ON
0 - 127

00
00

1
1
1
1
1
1
3F

00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
01 - 7F
01 - 7F

PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
PITCH EG RELEASE TIME
VELOCITY LIMIT LOW
VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH

-64 -+63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
1 - 127
1 - 127

40
40
40
40
01
7F

Parameter

Description

PITCH COARSE
PITCH FINE
LEVEL
ALTERNATE GROUP
PAN
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND

-64 - +63
-64 - +63 [cent]
0 - 127
0/OFF, 1 - 127
0/random, 1/L63 - 64/C - 127/R63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127

Default
(H)
40
40
Depends on the note
”
”
”
”
7F

nn
69
nn
6A
nn
6B
nn
6C
nn
6D
nn
6E
TOTAL SIZE

nn = Part Number (0:1Part, 1:2Part, 2:3Part, ..., 15:16Part)
For the DRUM PART, the following parameters have no effect.
•
•
•
•
•

SOFT PEDAL
BANK SELECT LSB
MONO/POLY
SCALE TUNING
PORTAMENTO

•
•
•
•
•

PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
PITCH EF RELEASE TIME
POLY AFTER TOUCH

MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP) [XG]
Address
(H)
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr

A-28

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

MIDI Data Format
3n
rr
08
3n
rr
09
3n
rr
0A
3n
rr
0B
3n
rr
0C
3n
rr
0D
3n
rr
0E
3n
rr
0F
TOTAL SIZE

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10

00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F

KEY ASSIGN
Rcv NOTE OFF
Rcv NOTE ON
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK RATE
EG DECAY1 RATE
EG DECAY2 RATE

0/SINGLE, 1/MULTI
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63

00
Depends on the note
01
40
40
40
40
40

[Note]
n: Drum number (0 - 1)
rr: note number (0D - 5B)
When XG system on or GM mode on messages are received, all Drum Setup parameters are initialized.
The Drum Setup Reset message can be used to initialized each Drum Setup parameter.
Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter values to be initialized.

Parameter Bass Address
Model ID = 4B [QS300]

Bulk Dump
Address
(H) (M) (L)
USER
11
00
00
NORMAL
VOICE
00
1F
00

Description
User Normal Voice 1
:
User Normal Voice 32

Appendix

MIDI Bulk Dump table (USER NORMAL VOICE) [QS300]
Size Data
(H) (H)

Parameter

17D 20-7E

Voice Name

Description

Default
(H)

[Common]
11

00
:
07
08
:
0A
0B
0C

01-03
00-7F

0D
:
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

not used
”
”
Element Switch
Voice Level

MIDI Data Format

Address
(H)

1:Element 1 on, 2:Element 2 on, 3:Element 1 and 2 on

not used
”
”
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-01
00-02
00-01
00-3F
00-7F
00-7F
00-3F
00-0F
00-1F
20-60
0E -72
00-05
00-7F
00-03
39-47
39-47
39-47
00-7F
00-3F
00-3F
00-3F

Wave Number High
Wave Number Low
Note Limit Low
Note Limit High
Velocity Limit Low
Velocity Limit High
Filter EG Velocity Curve
LFO Wave Select
LFO Phase Initialize
LFO Speed
LFO Delay
LFO Fade Time
LFO PMD Depth
LFO CMD Depth
LFO AMD Depth
Note Shift
Detune
Pitch Scaling
Pitch Scaling Center Note
Pitch EG Depth
Velocity PEG Level Sensitivity
Velocity PEG Rate Sensitivity
PEG Rate Scaling
PEG Rate Scaling Center Note
PEG Rate 1
PEG Rate 2
PEG Rate 3

[Element 1]
bit13-bit7
bit6-bit0

0:saw, 1:tri, 2:S&H
0:OFF, 1:ON

0:100%, 1:50%, 2:20%, 3:10%, 4:5%, 5:0%
0:1/2oct, 1:1oct, 2:2oct, 3:4oct

A-29

MIDI Data Format
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C

00-3F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-3F
00-07
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
39-47
39-47
39-47
00-7F
00-3F
00-3F
00-3F
00-3F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-06
00-0F
39-47
00-7F
00-0F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
39-47

8D
:
DC
DD
:
12C
12D
:
17C
TOTAL SIZE

17D

nn=Voice Number (00-1F)

A-30

PEG Rate 4
PEG Level 0
PEG Level 1
PEG Level 2
PEG Level 3
PEG Level 4
Filter Resonance
Velocity Sensitivity
Cutoff Frequency
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 1
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 2
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 3
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 4
Cutoff Scaling Offset 1
Cutoff Scaling Offset 2
Cutoff Scaling Offset 3
Cutoff Scaling Offset 4
Velocity FEG Level Sensitivity
Velocity FEG Rate Sensitivity
FEG Rate Scaling
FEG Rate Scaling Center Note
FEG Rate 1
FEG Rate 2
FEG Rate 3
FEG Rate 4
FEG Level 0
FEG Level 1
FEG Level 2
FEG Level 3
FEG Level 4
Element Level
Level Scaling Break Point 1
Level Scaling Break Point 2
Level Scaling Break Point 3
Level Scaling Break Point 4
Level Scaling Offset 1
Level Scaling Offset 2
Level Scaling Offset 3
Level Scaling Offset 4
Velocity Curve
Pan
AEG Rate Scaling
AEG Scaling Center Note
AEG Key on Delay
AEG Attack Rate
AEG Decay 1 Rate
AEG Decay 2 Rate
AEG Release Rate
AEG Decay 1 Level
AEG Decay 2 Level
Address Offset High
Address Offset Low
Resonance Sensitivity

0 (Left)-14 (Right), 15:Scaling

bit13-bit7
bit6-bit0
[Element 2]
same as [Element 1]
”
”
[Element 3]
not used
”
”
[Element 4]
not used
”
”

MIDI Data Format

XG Normal Voice List
Bank Select MSB = 000, LSB = Bank Number
Voice names in bold typeface are voices that can be selected in the Disklavier.
The Disklavier can produce all the voices listed below, but can only display bank 0 voices.
Instrument
Group
Piano

Instrument
Group
Organ

Guitar

Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
17
0
DrawOrgn
32
DetDrwOr
33
60sDrOr1
34
60sDrOr2
35
70sDrOr1
36
DrawOrg2
37
60sDrOr3
38
EvenBar
40
16+2"2/3
64
Organ Ba
65
70sDrOr2
66
CheezOrg
67
DrawOrg3
18
0
PercOrgn
24
70sPcOr1
32
DetPrcOr
33
LiteOrg
37
PercOrg2
19
0
RockOrgn
64
RotaryOr
65
SloRotar
66
FstRotar
20
0
ChrchOrg
32
ChurOrg3
35
ChurOrg2
40
NotreDam
64
OrgFlute
65
TrmOrgFl
21
0
ReedOrgn
40
Puff Org
22
0
Acordion
32
AccordIt
23
0
Harmnica
32
Harmo 2
24
0
TangoAcd
64
TngoAcd2
25
0
NylonGtr
16
NylonGt2
25
NylonGt3
43
VelGtHrm
96
Ukulele
26
0
SteelGtr
16
SteelGt2
35
12StrGtr
40
Nyln&Stl
41
Stl&Body
96
Mandolin
27
0
Jazz Gtr
18
MelloGtr
32
JazzAmp
28
0
CleanGtr
32
ChorusGt
29
0
Mute.Gtr
40
FunkGtr1
41
MuteStlG
43
FunkGtr2
45
Jazz Man
30
0
Ovrdrive
43
Gt.Pinch
31
0
Dist.Gtr
40
FeedbkGt
41
FeedbGt2
32
0
GtrHarmo
65
GtFeedbk
66
GtrHrmo2

Bank 18 : Dark
Bank 19 : Dark
Bank 20 : Resonant
Bank 24 : Attack
Bank 24 : Release
Bank 27 : Reso Sweep
Bank 28 : Muted
Bank 32 : Detune 1
Bank 33 : Detune 2

Element
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1

Instrument
Group
Bass

Strings

Bank 34 : Detune 3
Bank 35 : Octave 1
Bank 36 : Octave 2
Bank 37 : 5th 1
Bank 38 : 5th 2
Bank 39 : Bend
Bank 40 : Tutti
Bank 41 : Tutti
Bank 42 : Tutti

Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
33
0
Aco.Bass
40
JazzRthm
45
VXUprght
34
0
FngrBass
18
FingrDrk
27
FlangeBa
40
Ba&DstEG
43
FngrSlap
45
FngBass2
65
ModAlem
35
0
PickBass
28
MutePkBa
36
0
Fretless
32
Fretles2
33
Fretles3
34
Fretles4
96
SynFretl
97
Smooth
37
0
SlapBas1
27
ResoSlap
32
PunchThm
38
0
SlapBas2
43
VeloSlap
39
0
SynBass1
18
SynBa1Dk
20
FastResB
24
AcidBass
35
Clv Bass
40
TeknoBa
64
Oscar
65
SqrBass
66
RubberBa
96
Hammer
40
0
SynBass2
6
MelloSB1
12
Seq Bass
18
ClkSynBa
19
SynBa2Dk
32
SmthBa 2
40
ModulrBa
41
DX Bass
64
X WireBa
41
0
Violin
8
SlowVln
42
0
Viola
43
0
Cello
44
0
Contrabs
45
0
Trem.Str
8
SlowTrStr
40
Susp Str
46
0
Pizz.Str
47
0
Harp
40
YangChin
48
0
Timpani

Element
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1

Instrument
Group
Ensemble

Brass

Bank 43 : Velo-Switch
Bank 45 : Velo-Xfade
Bank 64 : Other wave
Bank 65 : Other wave
Bank 66 : Other wave
Bank 67 : Other wave
Bank 68 : Other wave
Bank 69 : Other wave
Bank 70 : Other wave

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
49
0
Strings1
3
S.Strngs
8
SlowStr
24
ArcoStr
35
60sStrng
40
Orchestr
41
Orchstr2
42
TremOrch
45
VeloStr
50
0
Strings2
3
S.SlwStr
8
LegatoSt
40
Warm Str
41
Kingdom
64
70s Str
65
Str Ens3
51
0
Syn.Str1
27
ResoStr
64
Syn Str4
65
SS Str
52
0
Syn.Str2
53
0
ChoirAah
3
S.Choir
16
Ch.Aahs2
32
MelChoir
40
ChoirStr
54
0
VoiceOoh
55
0
SynVoice
40
SynVox2
41
Choral
64
AnaVoice
56
0
Orch.Hit
35
OrchHit2
64
Impact
57
0
Trumpet
16
Trumpet2
17
BriteTrp
32
WarmTrp
58
0
Trombone
18
Trmbone2
59
0
Tuba
16
Tuba 2
60
0
Mute.Trp
61
0
Fr.Horn
6
FrHrSolo
32
FrHorn2
37
HornOrch
62
0
BrasSect
35
Tp&TbSec
40
BrssSec2
41
HiBrass
42
MelloBrs
63
0
SynBras1
12
QuackBr
20
RezSynBr
24
PolyBrss
27
SynBras3
32
JumpBrss
45
AnaVelBr
64
AnaBrss1
64
0
SynBras2
18
Soft Brs
40
SynBras4
41
ChorBrss
45
VelBras2
64
AnaBras2

Element
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2

MIDI Data Format

Bank 0 : (GM)
Bank 1 : Key Scale Planning
Bank 3 : Stereo
Bank 6 : Single
Bank 8 : Slow
Bank 12 : Fast Decay
Bank 14 : Double Attack
Bank 16 : Bright
Bank 17 : Bright

Element
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2

Appendix

Chromatic
Percussion

Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
1
0
GrandPno
1
GrndPnoK
18
MelloGrP
40
PianoStr
41
Dream
2
0
BritePno
1
BritPnoK
3
0
E.Grand
1
ElGrPnoK
32
Det.CP80
40
ElGrPno1
41
ElGrPno2
4
0
HnkyTonk
1
HnkyTnkK
5
0
E.Piano1
1
El.Pno1K
18
MelloEP1
32
Chor.EP1
40
HardEl.P
45
VX El.P1
64
60sEl.P
6
0
E.Piano2
1
El.Pno2K
32
Chor.EP2
33
DX Hard
34
DXLegend
40
DX Phase
41
DX+Analg
42
DXKotoEP
45
VX El.P2
7
0
Harpsi.
1
Harpsi.K
25
Harpsi.2
35
Harpsi.3
8
0
Clavi.
1
Clavi. K
27
ClaviWah
64
PulseClv
65
PierceCl
9
0
Celesta
10
0
Glocken
11
0
MusicBox
64
Orgel
12
0
Vibes
1
VibesK
45
HardVibe
13
0
Marimba
1
MarimbaK
64
SineMrmb
97
Balafon2
98
Log Drum
14
0
Xylophon
15
0
TubulBel
96
ChrchBel
97
Carillon
16
0
Dulcimer
35
Dulcimr2
96
Cimbalom
97
Santur

Bank 71 : Other wave
Bank 72 : Other wave
Bank 96 : Other wave
Bank 97 : Other wave
Bank 98 : Other wave
Bank 99 : Other wave
Bank 100 : Other wave
Bank 101 : Other wave

A-31

MIDI Data Format
Bank Select
MSB = 064, LSB = 000
SFX Voice
Instrument Program Bank
Group
#
#
Reed
65
0
66
0
40
43
67
0
40
41
64
68
0
69
0
70
0
71
0
72
0
Pipe
73
0
74
0
75
0
76
0
77
0
78
0
79
0
80
0
Synth Lead 81
0
6
8
18
19
64
65
66
82
0
6
8
18
19
20
24
25
40
41
45
96
83
0
65
84
0
64
85
0
64
65
86
0
24
64
87
0
35
88
0
16
64
65
Synth Pad 89
0
64
90
0
16
17
18
64
65
91
0
64
65
66
67

A-32

EleVoice Name ment
SprnoSax
1
Alto Sax
1
Sax Sect
2
HyprAlto
2
TenorSax
1
BrthTnSx
2
SoftTenr
2
TnrSax 2
1
Bari.Sax
1
Oboe
2
Eng.Horn
1
Bassoon
1
Clarinet
1
Piccolo
1
Flute
1
Recorder
1
PanFlute
1
Bottle
2
Shakhchi
2
Whistle
1
Ocarina
1
SquareLd
2
Square 2
1
LMSquare
2
Hollow
1
Shmoog
2
Mellow
2
SoloSine
2
SineLead
1
Saw.Lead
2
Saw 2
1
ThickSaw
2
DynaSaw
1
DigiSaw
2
Big Lead
2
HeavySyn
2
WaspySyn
2
PulseSaw
2
Dr. Lead
2
VeloLead
2
Seq Ana
2
CaliopLd
2
Pure Pad
2
Chiff Ld
2
Rubby
2
CharanLd
2
DistLead
2
WireLead
2
Voice Ld
2
SynthAah
2
VoxLead
2
Fifth Ld
2
Big Five
2
Bass &Ld
2
Big&Low
2
Fat&Prky
2
SoftWurl
2
NewAgePd 2
Fantasy2
2
Warm Pad 2
ThickPad
2
Soft Pad
2
SinePad
2
Horn Pad
2
RotarStr
2
PolySyPd
2
PolyPd80
2
ClickPad
2
Ana Pad
2
SquarPad
2

Instrument Program Bank
Group
#
#
Synth Pad 92
0
64
66
67
93
0
64
65
94
0
64
65
95
0
96
0
20
27
64
66
Synth
97
0
Effects
45
64
65
66
98
0
27
64
99
0
12
14
18
35
40
41
42
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
100
0
18
19
40
64
65
66
67
101
0
64
96
102
0
64
65
66
67
68
70
71
96
103
0
8
14
64
65
66
67
68
69
104
0
64

EleVoice Name ment
ChoirPad
2
Heaven2
2
Itopia
2
CC Pad
2
BowedPad
2
Glacier
2
GlassPad
2
MetalPad
2
Tine Pad
2
Pan Pad
2
Halo Pad
2
SweepPad
2
Shwimmer
2
Converge
2
PolarPad
2
Celstial
2
Rain
2
ClaviPad
2
HrmoRain
2
AfrcnWnd
2
Caribean
2
SoundTrk
2
Prologue
2
Ancestrl
2
Crystal
2
SynDrCmp
2
Popcorn
2
TinyBell
2
RndGlock
2
GlockChi
2
ClearBel
2
ChorBell
2
SynMalet
1
SftCryst
2
LoudGlok
2
XmasBell
2
VibeBell
2
DigiBell
2
AirBells
2
BellHarp
2
Gamelmba
2
Atmosphr
2
WarmAtms 2
HollwRls
2
NylonEP
2
NylnHarp
2
Harp Vox
2
AtmosPad
2
Planet
2
Bright
2
FantaBel
2
Smokey
2
Goblins
2
GobSyn
2
50sSciFi
2
Ring Pad
2
Ritual
2
ToHeaven
2
Night
2
Glisten
2
BelChoir
2
Echoes
2
EchoPad2
2
Echo Pan
2
EchoBell
2
Big Pan
2
SynPiano
2
Creation
2
Stardust
2
Reso Pan
2
Sci-Fi
2
Starz
2

Instrument Program Bank
Group
#
#
Ethnic
105
0
32
35
96
97
106
0
28
96
97
98
107
0
108
0
96
97
109
0
110
0
111
0
112
0
64
96
97
Percussive 113
0
96
97
98
99
100
101
114
0
115
0
97
98
116
0
96
117
0
96
118
0
64
65
66
119
0
64
65
120
0
Sound
121
0
Effects
122
0
123
0
124
0
125
0
126
0
127
0
128
0

EleVoice Name ment
Sitar
1
DetSitar
2
Sitar 2
2
Tambra
2
Tamboura
2
Banjo
1
MuteBnjo
1
Rabab
2
Gopichnt
2
Oud
2
Shamisen
1
Koto
1
T. Koto
2
Kanoon
2
Kalimba
1
Bagpipe
2
Fiddle
1
Shanai
1
Shanai2
1
Pungi
1
Hichriki
2
TnklBell
2
Bonang
2
Gender
2
Gamelan
2
S.Gamlan
2
Rama Cym
2
AsianBel
2
Agogo
2
SteelDrm
2
GlasPerc
2
ThaiBell
2
WoodBlok
1
Castanet
1
TaikoDrm
1
Gr.Cassa
1
MelodTom 2
Mel Tom2
1
Real Tom
2
Rock Tom
2
Syn.Drum
1
Ana Tom
1
ElecPerc
2
RevCymbl
1
FretNoiz
2
BrthNoiz
2
Seashore
2
Tweet
2
Telphone
1
Helicptr
1
Applause
1
Gunshot
1

Program

#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

MSB=064
LSB=000

Element

CuttngNz
CttngNz2

1
2

Str Slap

Fl.KClik

Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed

1
1
1
2
2
2

Dog
Horse
Bird 2

1
1
1

Ghost
Maou

2
2

Program

#
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

MSB=064
LSB=000

Element

Tel.Dial
DoorSqek
Door Slam
Scratch
Scratch 2
WindChm
Telphon2

1
1
1
1
2
1
1

CarEngin
Car Stop
Car Pass
CarCrash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst
Coaster
SbMarine

1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2

Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart
FootStep

1
1
1
1
1

MchinGun
LaserGun
Xplosion
FireWork

1
2
2
2

: No Sound

MIDI Data Format

TG300B Normal Voice List
Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = ooo
Instrument
Group
Piano

Instrument
Group
Organ

Guitar

Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
17
0
DrawOrgn
1
70sDrOr1
8
DetDrwOr
9
70sDrOr2
16
60sDrOr1
17
60sDrOr2
18
60sDrOr3
24
CheezOrg
32
DrawOrg2
33
EvenBar
40
Organ Ba
126 Slap-2
127 harpsi1
18
0
PercOrgn
1
70sPcOr1
8
DetPrcOr
32
PercOrg2
126 Slap-3
127 harpsi2
19
0
RockOrgn
8
RotaryOr
16
SloRotar
24
FstRotar
126 Slap-4
127 harpsi3
20
0
ChrchOrg
8
ChurOrg2
16
ChurOrg3
24
OrgFlute
32
TrmOrgFl
126 Slap-5
127 clavi1
21
0
ReedOrgn
126 Slap-6
127 clavi2
22
0
Acordion
8
AccordIt
126 Slap-7
127 clavi3
23
0
Harmnica
1
Harmo 2
126 Slap-8
127 celesta1
24
0
TangoAcd
126 Finger-1
127 celesta2
25
0
NylonGtr
8
Ukulele
16
NylonGt3
24
VelGtHrm
32
NylonGt2
40
LequintG
126 Finger-2
127 synbras1
26
0
SteelGtr
8
12StrGtr
9
Nyln&Stl
16
Mandolin
32
SteelGt2
126 Picked-1
127 synbras2
27
0
Jazz Gtr
1
MelloGtr
8
PdlSteel
126 Picked-2
127 synbras3
28
0
CleanGtr
8
ChorusGt
126 FretlsBs
127 synbras4

Element
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2

Instrument
Group
Guitar

Bass

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
29
0
Mute.Gtr
8
FunkGtr1
16
FunkGtr2
126 A-Bass
127 synbass1
30
0
Ovrdrive
126 Choir-1
127 synbass2
31
0
Dist.Gtr
8
FeedbkGt
9
FeedbGt2
126 Choir-2
127 synbass3
32
0
GtrHarmo
8
GtFeedbk
126 Choir-3
127 synbass4
33
0
Aco.Bass
126 Choir-4
127 newagepd
34
0
FngrBass
1
FngBass2
126 Strngs-1
127 synharmo
35
0
PickBass
8
MutePkBa
126 Strngs-2
127 choir pd
36
0
Fretless
1
Fretles2
2
Fretles3
3
Fretles4
4
SynFretl
5
Smooth
126 Strngs-3
127 bowed pd
37
0
SlapBas1
8
ResoSlap
126 Strngs-4
127 soundtrk
38
0
SlapBas2
126 E-Organ1
127 atmosphr
39
0
SynBass1
1
SynBa1Dk
8
AcidBass
9
FastResB
10
TeknoBa
16
ResoBass
126 E-Organ2
127 syn warm
40
0
SynBass2
1
ClkSynBa
2
ModulrBa
3
Seq Bass
8
DX Bass
9
X WireBa
16
RubberBa
17
SynBa2Dk
18
MelloSB1
19
SmthBa 2
126 E-Organ3
127 synfunny

Element
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1

Instrument
Group
Strings

Ensemble

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
41
0
Violin
8
SlowVln
126 E-Organ4
127 synecho1
42
0
Viola
126 E-Organ5
127 rain
43
0
Cello
126 E-Organ6
127 synoboe
44
0
Contrabs
126 E-Organ7
127 synecho2
45
0
Trem.Str
8
SlowTrStr
9
Susp Str
126 E-Organ8
127 synsolo
46
0
Pizz.Str
126 E-Organ9
127 synrdorg
47
0
Harp
126 SoftTP-1
127 synbell
48
0
Timpani
126 SoftTP-2
127 squareld
49
0
Strings1
1
Slow Str
8
Orchestr
9
Orchstr2
10
TremOrch
11
ChoirStr
16
S.Strngs
24
VeloStr
126 TP/TRB-1
127 strsect1
50
0
Strings2
1
70s Str
8
LegatoSt
9
Warm Str
10
S.SlwStr
126 TP/TRB-2
127 strsect2
51
0
Syn.Str1
1
Syn Str4
126 TP/TRB-3
127 strsect3
52
0
Syn.Str2
126 TP/TRB-4
127 pizz.str
53
0
ChoirAah
8
S.Choir
9
MelChoir
32
Ch.Aahs2
126 TP/TRB-5
127 violin 1
54
0
VoiceOoh
126 TP/TRB-6
127 violin 2
55
0
SynVoice
8
SynVox2
126 Sax-1
127 cello 1
56
0
Orch.Hit
1
OrchHit2
8
Impact
16
LoFiRave
126 Sax-2
127 cello 2

Element
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1

MIDI Data Format

Element
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2

Appendix

Chromatic
Percussion

Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
1
0
GrandPno
8
GrndPnoK
16
MelloGrP
126 A-Piano1
127 a.piano1
2
0
BritePno
8
BritPnoK
126 A-Piano2
127 a.piano2
3
0
E.Grand
1
ElGrPno1
2
ElGrPno2
8
ElGrPnoK
126 A-Piano3
127 a.piano3
4
0
HnkyTonk
8
HnkyTnkK
126 A-Piano4
127 e.piano1
5
0
E.Piano1
8
Chor.EP1
16
VX El.P1
24
60sEl.P
25
HardEl.P
26
MelloEP1
32
El.Pno1K
126 A-Piano5
127 e.piano2
6
0
E.Piano2
8
Chor.EP2
16
VX El.P2
24
DX Hard
32
El.Pno2K
126 A-Piano6
127 e.piano3
7
0
Harpsi.
8
Harpsi.3
16
Harpsi.K
24
Harpsi.2
126 A-Piano7
127 e.piano4
8
0
Clavi.
8
Clavi. K
126 E-Piano1
127 hnkytnk
9
0
Celesta
126 E-Piano2
127 e.organ1
10
0
Glocken
126 E-Piano3
127 e.organ2
11
0
MusicBox
126 A-Guitr1
127 e.organ3
12
0
Vibes
1
HardVibe
8
VibesK
126 A-Guitr2
127 e.organ4
13
0
Marimba
8
MarimbaK
17
Balafon2
24
Log Drum
126 A-Guitr3
127 pipeorg1
14
0
Xylophon
126 E-Guitr1
127 pipeorg2
15
0
TubulBel
8
ChrchBel
9
Carillon
126 E-Guitr2
127 pipeorg3
16
0
Dulcimer
1
Dulcimr2
8
Cimbalom
126 Slap-1
127 acordion

A-33

MIDI Data Format
Instrument
Group
Brass

Reed

Pipe

A-34

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
57
0
Trumpet
1
Trumpet2
24
BriteTrp
25
WarmTrp
126 Sax-3
127 contrabs
58
0
Trombone
1
Trmbone2
126 Sax-4
127 harp 1
59
0
Tuba
1
Tuba 2
126 Brass-1
127 harp 2
60
0
Mute.Trp
126 Brass-2
127 guitar 1
61
0
Fr.Horn
1
FrHorn2
8
FrHrSolo
16
HornOrch
126 Brass-3
127 guitar 2
62
0
BrasSect
8
BrssSec2
126 Brass-4
127 elecgtr1
63
0
SynBras1
1
PolyBrss
8
SynBras3
9
QuackBr
16
AnaBrss1
126 Brass-5
127 elecgtr2
64
0
SynBras2
1
Soft Brs
8
SynBras4
16
AnaBrss2
17
VelBras2
126 Orch-Hit
127 sitar
65
0
SprnoSax
127 a.bass 1
66
0
Alto Sax
8
HyprAlto
127 a.bass 2
67
0
TnrSax 2
8
BrthTnSx
127 e.bass 1
68
0
Bari.Sax
127 e.bass 2
69
0
Oboe
127 slapbas1
70
0
Eng.Horn
127 slapbas2
71
0
Bassoon
127 fretles1
72
0
Clarinet
127 fretles2
73
0
Piccolo
127 flute1
74
0
Flute
127 flute2
75
0
Recorder
127 piccolo1
76
0
PanFlute
127 piccolo2
77
0
Bottle
127 recorder
78
0
Shakhchi
127 panpipes
79
0
Whistle
127 sax1
80
0
Ocarina
127 sax2

Element
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1

Instrument
Group
Synth Lead

Synth Pad

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
81
0
SquareLd
1
Square 2
2
Hollow
3
Mellow
4
SoloSine
5
Shmoog
6
LMSquare
8
SineLead
127 sax3
82
0
Saw.Lead
1
Saw 2
2
PulseSaw
3
ThickSaw
4
Big Lead
5
VeloLead
6
HeavySyn
7
DynaSaw
8
Dr. Lead
16
WaspySyn
127 sax4
83
0
CaliopLd
2
Pure Pad
127 clarint1
84
0
Chiff Ld
127 clarint2
85
0
CharanLd
8
DistLead
127 oboe
86
0
Voice Ld
127 eng.horn
87
0
Fifth Ld
1
Big Five
127 bassoon
88
0
Bass &Ld
1
Big&Low
2
Fat&Prky
127 harmnica
89
0
NewAgePd
1
Fantasy2
127 trumpet1
90
0
Warm Pad
1
ThickPad
2
Horn Pad
3
RotarStr
4
Soft Pad
127 trumpet2
91
0
PolySyPd
1
PolyPd80
127 trmbone1
92
0
ChoirPad
1
Heaven2
127 trmbone2
93
0
BowedPad
127 fr.horn1
94
0
MetalPad
1
Tine Pad
2
Pan Pad
127 fr.horn2
95
0
Halo Pad
127 tuba
96
0
SweepPad
1
PolarPad
8
Converge
9
Shwimmer
10
Celstial
127 brssect1

Element
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1

Instrument
Group
Synth
Effects

Ethnic

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
97
0
Rain
1
HrmoRain
2
AfrcnWnd
8
ClaviPad
127 brssect2
98
0
SoundTrk
1
Ancestrl
2
Prologue
127 vibe1
99
0
Crystal
1
SynMalet
2
SftCryst
3
RndGlock
4
LoudGlok
5
GlockChi
6
ClearBel
7
XmasBell
8
VibeBell
9
DigiBell
16
ChorBell
17
AirBells
18
BellHarp
19
Gamelmba
127 vibe2
100
0
Atmosphr
1
WarmAtms
2
NylnHarp
3
Harp Vox
4
HollwRls
5
NylonEP
6
AtmosPad
127 symallet
101
0
Bright
127 maletwin
102
0
Goblins
1
GobSyn
2
50sSciFi
127 glocken
103
0
Echoes
1
EchoBell
2
Echo Pan
3
EchoPad2
4
Big Pan
6
SynPiano
127 tubulbel
104
0
Sci-Fi
1
Starz
127 xylophon
105
0
Sitar
1
Sitar 2
2
DetSitar
8
Tambra
16
Tamboura
127 marimba
106
0
Banjo
1
MuteBnjo
8
Rabab
16
Gopichnt
24
Oud
127 koto
107
0
Shamisen
127 sho
108
0
Koto
8
T. Koto
16
Kanoon
127 shakhchi
109
0
Kalimba
127 whistle1
110
0
Bagpipe
127 whistle2
111
0
Fiddle
127 bottle
112
0
Shanai
1
Shanai2
8
Pungi
16
Hichriki
127 breath

Element
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2

Instrument
Group
Percussive

Sound
Effects

Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
113
0
TnklBell
8
Bonang
9
Gender
10
Gamelan
11
S.Gamlan
16
Rama Cym
127 timpani
114
0
Agogo
127 melotom
115
0
SteelDrm
127 deepsnar
116
0
WoodBlok
8
Castanet
127 e.perc1
117
0
TaikoDrm
8
Gr.Cassa
127 e.perc2
118
0
MelodTom
1
Real Tom
8
Mel Tom2
9
Rock Tom
127 taiko
119
0
Syn.Drum
8
Ana Tom
9
ElecPerc
127 taikorim
120
0
RevCymbl
127 cymbal
121
0
FretNoiz
1
CuttngNz
2
Str Slap
3
CttngNz2
127 castanet
122
0
BrthNoiz
1
Fl.KClik
127 triangle
123
0
Seashore
1
Rain
2
Thunder
3
Wind
4
Stream
5
Bubble
127 orchehit
124
0
Tweet
1
Dog
2
Horse
3
Bird 2
127 telphone
125
0
Telphone
1
Tel.Dial
2
DoorSqek
3
DoorSlam
4
Scratch
5
WindChm
6
Scratch2
127 bird
126
0
Helicptr
1
CarEngin
2
Car Stop
3
Car Pass
4
CarCrash
5
Siren
6
Train
7
Jetplane
8
Starship
9
Burst
16
Coaster
127 jam
127
0
Applause
1
Laughing
2
Scream
3
Punch
4
Heart
5
FootStep
127 efctwatr
128
0
Gunshot
1
MchinGun
2
LaserGun
3
Xplosion
127 efctjngl

Element
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2

MIDI Data Format

XG Drum Voice List
Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = 000
Drum kit names in bold typeface are those that can be selected in the Disklavier.
Bank

127

126

Program #

Standard Kit

Standard2 Kit

Room Kit

Rock Kit

Electro Kit

Analog Kit

Jazz Kit

Brush Kit

Classic Kit

SFX 1

SFX 2

Reverse Cymbal

Note#

Note

-1

Key

Alternate

-1

D# -1

Hi Q

-1

Whip Slap

-1

Finger Snap

G# -1

Click Noise

Metronome Click

A# -1

Metronome Bell

-1

Seq Click L

Seq Click H

D# 0

Castanet

Snare L

G# 0

Sticks

Bass Drum L

A# 0

Open Rim Shot

Open Rim Shot 2

Bass Drum M

Bass Drum M 2

Bass Drum H

Bass Drum H 2

Side Stick

Snare M

D# 1

Hand Clap

Snare H

G# 1

A# 1

Mid Tom L

Room Tom 4

Rock Tom 4

E Tom 4

Mid Tom H

Room Tom 5

Rock Tom 5

E Tom 5

Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom

D# 2

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Tire Screech

Tambourine

Car Passing

off

Surdo Open

Scratch Push
Scratch Pull

Brush Tap
O

Brush Swirl L

Brush Swirl H

Snare Roll

Brush Slap

Floor Tom L
1
1

Hi Q

SD Rock M

Snare M

SD Rock H

Bass Drum M

Bass Drum H 4

Bass Drum M

Bass Drum H 3

BD Rock

BD Analog L

BD Rock

BD Gate

BD Analog H

Brush Slap L
Bass Drum L2
Gran Cassa
BD Jazz

BD Soft

Gran Cassa Mute

Analog Side Stick
Snare M 2

SD Room L

SD Rock

SD Rock L

Analog Snare L

Brush Slap M

Marching Sn M

Snare H 2

SD Room H

SD Rock Rim

SD Rock H

Analog Snare H

Brush Tap H

Marching Sn H

Room Tom 1

Rock Tom 1

E Tom 1

Brush Tom 1

Jazz Tom 1

Guitar Cutting Noise

Dial Tone

Guitar Cutting Noise 2

Door Creaking
Door Slam

String Slap
Analog Tom 1

Jazz Tom 1

Room Tom 2

Rock Tom 2

E Tom 2

Room Tom 3

Rock Tom 3

E Tom 3

Analog Tom 2

Scratch
Scratch 2
Windchime

Analog HH Closed 1

Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom

Snare L 2

Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H

Snare Roll 2

Telephone Ring2
Jazz Tom 2

Brush Tom 2

Jazz Tom 2

Jazz Tom 3

Brush Tom 3

Jazz Tom 3

Analog Tom 4

Jazz Tom 4

Brush Tom 4

Analog Tom 5

Jazz Tom 5

Brush Tom 5

Analog HH Closed 2

Hi-Hat Open

Analog Tom 3
Analog HH Open

Analog Cymbal
Room Tom 6

Rock Tom 6

E Tom 6

Analog Tom 6

Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 5
Hand Cym.Open L

Jazz Tom 6

Brush Tom 6

Jazz Tom 6
Hand Cym.Closed L
FL.Key Click

Splash Cymbal

Engine Start

Crash

G# 2

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

A# 2

Vibraslap

Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H

Burst Noise

Bongo L

Coaster

Conga H Mute

Analog Conga H

D# 3

Conga H Open

Analog Conga M

Conga L

Analog Conga L

Timbale H

Timbale L

Agogo H

G# 3

Agogo L

Cabasa

A# 3

D# 4

Claves

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Cuica Mute

Scratch Push

Cuica Open

Scratch Pull

G# 4

Triangle Mute

Triangle Open

A# 4

Shaker

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Horse Gallop

Bird 2

D# 5

Analog Cowbell

Siren
Hand Cym.Open H

MIDI Data Format

-1

Surdo Mute

Appendix

assign

Train
Jetplane

Hand Cym.Closed H

Maracas

Analog Maracas

Starship

SbMarine

Rain

Laughing

Thunder

Screaming

Wind

Punch

Samba Whistle H

Stream

Heartbeat

Samba Whistle L

Bubble

Footsteps

Guiro Long

Guiro Short

Feed
Analog Claves

Dog

Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
FireWork

Ghost
Maou

: Same as Standard kit
: No sound

A-35

MIDI Data Format

TG300B Drum Voice List
Program #
Note# Note

Alternate

128

Standard Kit

Room Kit

Power Kit

Electro Kit

Analog Kit

Jazz Kit

Brush Kit

Orchestra Kit

SFX Set

C/M Kit

assign
0

Snare Roll

Finger Snap

Hi Q

Hi-Hat Closed

Whip Slap

Hi-Hat Pedal

Scratch Push

Hi-Hat Open

Scratch Pull

Ride Cymbal 1

Sticks

Click Noise

Metronome Click

Metronome Bell

Bass Drum M

Bass Drum H

Side Stick

Snare M

Hand Clap

Snare H

Floor Tom L

BD Jazz

BD Soft

SD Power

SD Electronic

Analog Snare L

Gran Cassa

Brush Tap

Concert SD

Brush Slap

Castanet

High-Q

Brush Swirl

Concert SD

Slap

Jazz Tom 1

Timpani F

Scratch Push

Timpani F#

Scratch Pull

Jazz Tom 2

SD Power
Room Tom 1

Room Tom 1

E Tom 1

Room Tom 2

E Tom 2

Analog Tom 1
Analog HH Closed 1
Analog Tom 2
Analog HH Closed 2

Room Tom 3

E Tom 3

Hi-Hat Open

Analog Tom 3

Jazz Tom 3

Analog HH Open

Timpani G

Sticks

Timpani G#

Square Click

Timpani A

Metronome Click

Timpani A#

Metronome Bell

Mid Tom L

Room Tom 4

E Tom 4

Analog Tom 4

Jazz Tom 4

Timpani B

Guitar Fret Noise

Mid Tom H

Room Tom 5

E Tom 5

Analog Tom 5

Jazz Tom 5

Timpani C

Guitar Cutting Down

Timpani C#

Guitar Cutting Up

Room Tom 6

E Tom 6

Jazz Tom 6

Crash Cymbal 1

High Tom

Ride Cymbal 1

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Tambourine

Splash Cymbal

Cowbell

Crash Cymbal 2

Vibraslap

Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H

Analog Cymbal
Analog Tom 6

Reverse Cymbal

Timpani D

Ac Bass Slap

Timpani D#

FL.Key Click

Timpani E

Laughing

Timpani F

Screaming

Footsteps 2
Applause

Hand Cym.2

Door Creaking
Door Slam

Bongo L

Conga H Mute

Analog Conga H

Windchime

Conga H Open

Analog Conga M

Scratch
Engine Start

Analog Conga L

Conga L

Timbale H

Car Passing

Timbale L

Crash

Agogo H

Siren

Agogo L

Cabasa

Maracas

Tire Screech

Train
Jetplane
Analog Maracas

Helicopter

Samba Whistle H

Starship

Samba Whistle L

Gunshot

Guiro Short

Machine Gun

Guiro Long

Laser Gun

Hi-Hat Open 2

Footsteps 1

Hi-Hat Open 1

Heartbeat
Hand Cym.1

SD Electro

Punch
Analog Cowbell

Analog Claves

Vibraslap

Claves

Wood Block H

Dog

Laughing

Wood Block L

Horse Gallop

Screaming

Cuica Mute

Bird Tweet

Punch

Cuica Open

Rain

Explosion

Heartbeat

Triangle Mute

Thunder

Footsteps 1

Triangle Open

Wind

Footsteps 2

Shaker

Seashore

Applause

Jingle Bell

Stream

Door Creaking

Bell Tree

Bubble

Door Slam

Castanet

Scratch

Surdo Mute

Surdo Open

Windchime

Car Passing

Crash

Engine Start
Applause

Tire Screech

Siren

Train

Jetplain

Helicopter

Starship

Gunshot

Machine Gun

Laser Gun

Explosion

100

Dog

101

Horse Gallop

102

Bird Tweet

103

Rain

104

Thunder

105

Wind

106

Seashore

107

Stream

108

Bubble

: Same as Standard kit
: No sound

A-36

BD Analog H
Analog Side Stick

Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom

BD Electronic

Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H

BD Jazz
BD Power

MIDI Data Format

Effect Type List
Effect Type

Description

NO EFFECT
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
CELESTE3
CELESTE4
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3

Effect turned off.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Chorus with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
Celeste with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.

NO EFFECT
HALL1
HALL2
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
STAGE1
STAGE2
PLATE
DELAY L, C, R
DELAY L, R
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
EARLY REF1
EARLY REF2
GATE REVERB
REVERSE GATE
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
CELESTE3
CELESTE4
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
SYMPHONIC
ROTARY SPEAKER
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
PHASER1
PHASER2
DISTORTION
OVER DRIVE
AMP SIMULATOR
3BAND EQ (MONO)
2BAND EQ (STEREO)
AUTO WAH (LFO)
THRU

Effect turned off.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
A program that creates three delay sounds; L, R, and C (center).
A program that creates two delay sounds; L and R. Two feedback delays are provided.
Two delays (L and R) and independent feedback delays for L and R.
A program that crosses the feedback of two delays.
An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
A simulation of gated reverb.
A program that simulates gated reverb played backwards.
A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
Conventional chorus program that add natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Chorus with stereo input.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
Celeste with stereo input.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
A multi-phase version of CELESTE.
A simulation of a rotary speaker. You can use AC1 (assignable controller) etc. to control the speed of rotation.
An effect that cyclically modulates the volume.
A program that cyclically moves that sound image to left and right, front and back.
Cyclically changes the phase to add modulation to the sound.
Phaser with stereo input.
Adds a sharp-edged distortion to the sound.
Adds mild distortion to the sound.
A simulation of a guitar amp.
A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing.
A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts.
Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. With an AC1 etc. this can function as a pedal wah.
Bypass without applying any effect.

MIDI Data Format

NO EFFECT
HALL1
HALL2
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
STAGE1
STAGE2
PLATE
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
BASEMENT

Appendix

Exclusive
MSB
LSB
REVERB
00
00
01
00
01
01
02
00
02
01
02
02
03
00
03
01
04
00
10
00
11
00
13
00
CHORUS
00
00
41
00
41
01
41
02
41
08
42
00
42
01
42
02
42
08
43
00
43
01
43
08
VARIATION
00
00
01
00
01
01
02
00
02
01
02
02
03
00
03
01
04
00
05
00
06
00
07
00
08
00
09
00
09
01
0A
00
0B
00
14
00
14
01
14
02
41
00
41
01
41
02
41
08
42
00
42
01
42
02
42
08
43
00
43
01
43
08
44
00
45
00
46
00
47
00
48
00
48
08
49
00
4A
00
4B
00
4C
00
4D
00
4E
00
40
00

* MSB, LSB is represented in hexadecimal.
* LCB=0 is the basic effect type.

A-37

MIDI Data Format

Effect Parameter List
No Parameter

Range

Value

HALL1, HALL2, ROOM 1, 2, 3, STAGE 1, 2, PLATE
1 Reverb Time
0.3~30.0s
0-69
2 Diffusion
0~10
0-10
3 Initial Delay
0~63
0-63
4 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
0-52
5 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
34-60
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DR ~ E=R ~ E>R63 1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
16
WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, BASEMENT
1 Reverb Time
0.3~30.0s
0-69
2 Diffusion
0~10
0-10
3 Initial Delay
0~63
0-63
4 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
0-52
5 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
34-60
6 Width
0.5~10.2m
0-37
7 Height
0.5~20.2m
0-73
8 Depth
0.5~30.2m
0-104
9 Wall Vary
0~30
0-30
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DR~E=R~E>R63
1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
16
DELAY L, C, R
1 Lch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
2 Rch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
3 Cch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
4 Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
6 Cch Level
0~127
0-127
7 High Damp
0.1~1.0
1-10
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DW~D=W~DW~D=W~DR Delay
0.1~355.0ms
2 R->L Delay
0.1~355.0ms
3 Feedback Level -63~+63
4 Input Select
L, R, L&R
5 High Damp
0.1~1.0
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DW~D=W~DW~D=W~D
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”

A-38

Range

Value

See
Table

Control

1-3350
1-127
1-3550
1-127
1-10
1-3550
1-3550
0-127
1-127

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76

•

table#3
table#3

1-3550
1-3550
1-127
0-2
1-10

1-127

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
0-5
0-44
0-10
0-63
1-127
0-52
34-60

•

table#3
table#3

table#6
table#5

1-127
0-10
0-3
1-10

0-1
0-44
0-10
0-63
1-127
0-52
34-60

1-127
0-10
0-3
1-10

•

table#6
table#5

•

MIDI Data Format
No Parameter

Range

See
Table

0-127
1-127
0-52
34-60

table#7

1-127

Control

•

0-127
0-127
1-127
0-127

table#1

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127

table#3

table#2

table#3
•

0-127
0-127
1-127
0-63

table#1

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127

table#3

table#2

table#3
•

4-124

0-127
0-127
0-127

table#1

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127

table#3

table#2

table#3
•

Range

ROTARY SPEAKER
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO Depth
0~127
3
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DR, L->R, L<-R,
Lturn, Rturn, L/R
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PHASER1, PHASER2
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO Depth
0~127
3 Phase Shift
0~127
4 Feedback Level -63~+63
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DW~D=W~DW~D=W~DW~D=W~DW~D=W~D
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”

A-39

MIDI Data Format
No Parameter

Range

DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE
1 Drive
0~127
2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
3 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
4 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
5 Output Level
0~127
6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz
8 EQ Mid Gain
-12~+12dB
9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~DW~D=W~D
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”

A-40

Range

Value

See
Table

50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76

table#3

100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0

14-54 table#3
52-76
10-120

0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0

0-127 table#1
0-127
0-127
10-120

50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W~D=W~D
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : Yes
Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Author : Yamaha Corporation
Create Date : 2014:04:14 13:21:33+09:00
Modify Date : 2014:04:14 13:35:39+09:00
Subject : Operation Manual
Has XFA : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format : application/pdf
Title : Disklavier Control Unit DKC-850
Description : Operation Manual
Creator : Yamaha Corporation
Metadata Date : 2014:04:14 13:35:39+09:00
Document ID : uuid:1732a78e-287e-48ba-922f-0637ef28b13d
Instance ID : uuid:087abe61-e3bf-40b6-9dc9-54a96f605491
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseOutlines
Page Count : 203

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu

Upload a User Manual

Versions of this User Manual:

Wiki Guide
HTML
Mobile
Download & Help

Views

User Manual
Discussion / Help

Navigation